Home

proces-rm002 - Literature Library

1. CV3 CV2 o 0 00 o 0 00 P 0 00 P 0 00 C1 Tracking C2 Tracking CV3 Tracking 0 00 Calculated C3 C 3 Limits 100 00 0 00 0 00 Calculated C2 C 2 Limits 100 00 0 00 0 00 Calculated Value From Previous Page i C1 Limits CV Maximum and 100 00 Minimum Limits 0 00 Enable CV Tracking p Enable CV Tracking The following table shows the functions of page 3 of the CC Maintenance tab Table 48 CC Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description CV1 CV1 CV2 or Type the value for CV Normal Operation CV10per CV3 of Devices e CV20per Code A e CV30per CV Maximum Limit Type the maximum limit for CV1 CV2 Configurationand e CV1HLimit CV1 CV2 or CV3 or CV3 Tuning e CV2HLimit Maintenance CV3HLimit Code D CV Minimum Limit Type the minimum limit for CV1 CV2 e CViLLimit CV1 CV2 or CV3 or CV3 e CV2LLimit e CV3LLimit Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 191 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Table 48 CC Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description Enable CV Tracking Check to enable CV tracking when Equipment CVTrackReq autotune is OFF Maintenance This parameter is ignored in Hand and Code C Override mode Maintenance Tab Page 4 Page 4 of the CC Maintenance tab shows the following information e CV value in Hand mode e Initial CV value EU e CV output
2. a E Pie ma e monitoring for fault conditions The valve can have but does not require limit switch feedback for the ends of travel The valve can optionally use an output to trigger a valve stop Add On Instruction P_ValveMO function such as breaking a seal in circuit on the valve operator to stop travel or switch Motor Operated Valve Inp_OpenLS Inp_ClosedLS Inp_ActuatorF ault Inp_OpenPermOK Out_Open fa Sts_Closed f Sts_CmdToOpen fa Inp_OpenNBPermOK Sts_Opening Inp_ClosePermOK Sts_Opened W Inp_ClaseNBPermOK Sts_CmdToClose Sts_Closing the direction of travel Click the link to access the kieg aiy SA Reference Manual u a2 Sts_Oper 2 SYSLIB RM014 Mix proof Valve P_ValveMP Global Object Faceplate Mix Proof alve Home Operator 8 et A Add On Instruction tiosan J wie Brock Vals 7 0 Closed The P _ValveMP instruction R controls one mix proof valve in a variety of modes and states and can verify that the valve reached the commanded position An alarm can be provided on failure to reach a target position This instruction supports mix proof valves with or without additional connections for cleaning CIP clean in place or steaming SIP sanitize in place Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM035 Solenoid operated Valve P_ValveSO The P_ValveSO instruction is
3. 182 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Appendix F Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The faceplates that appear in this section are designed to let the function blocks and built in firmware instructions for the Logix5000 controllers interface with the Process Library Add On Instructions For details on built in instructions see the Logix5000 Controllers Advanced Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756 RM006 Built in Autotune The RSLogix 5000 PIDE autotuner provides an open loop autotuner that is built into the PIDE instruction This function filters a signal to assist with the calculation of control variables You can autotune from PanelView Plus terminals or any other operator interface devices as well as RSLogix 5000 software The PIDE block has an Autotune Tag type PIDE_LAUTOTUNE that you specify for those PIDE blocks that you want to autotune IMPORTANT The PIDE autotuner is installed with RSLogix 5000 software but you need an activation key to enable the autotuner The autotuner is supported only in function block programming it is not available in relay ladder or structured text programming The Autotune function is accessed through page 2 of the Maintenance tab of the Built in PIDE faceplate Operator Tab The Operator tab of the PIDE faceplate shows the following information e Proportional gain tuned slow medium or fast e Inte
4. MMC Autotune Faceplate Help uy ll I Autotune Start Abort Autotune pi Ci Use Autotune Values Copy the selected tuning values into the current IMC Gain Time Constant Dead Time and Response Time Constant Instructions 1 Select Process Type and enter the CW s Step Size 2 Enter the Approximation Factors if using Integrating Process Type 3 olf desired select PW1 s Noise Level and enter the P 1 Tuning Limit and PI s Autotune Timeout 4 lf desired select PY 2 s Noise Level and enter the PY Tuning Limit and P s Autotune Timeout 5 Press the Autotune Start Button 6 Once the Autotune sequence completes check for and correct any errors before continuing f Select the desired Response Speedfsi 8 olf desired press P 1 s Use Autotune Values button to copy the selected values into the current MME Tags for P1 9 lf desired press PW Z s Use Autotune Values button to copy the selected values into the current MMC Tags for PY Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 231 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Proportional re Integral e re Ai ere Enhanced ae instruction provides o o enhanced capabilities over the standar PID instruction The instruction uses the Derivative Enhanced PI DE velocity form of the PID algorithm The gain terms are applied to the change in the value of error or PV not the value of error or PV Visualiz
5. SELECT CONTROLLER 2 ASSOCIATE HMI DEFINE HMI ALARM SERVER 4 PREPARE XML IMPORT FILE QUICK BUILD A SYNCHRONIZE ME amp LOGIX TAGS P B SELECT DATA TYPE i f C DEFINE TRIGGERS f P D DEFINE MESSAGE amp COLORS i 5 SAVE AML IMPORT FILE Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B 1 Select Controller Complete the steps starting on page 129 2 Associate HMI Complete the steps starting on page 133 However select Machine Edition ME for the product type on the Select HMI Project dialog box IMPORTANT Ifthe controllers in the alarm server are associated with FactoryTalk View SE software projects the ME XML import file building tools can be used as long as the data server device shortcut name for the controller is the same for SE and ME If the device shortcut names are different you must create separate Alarm Builder projects 3 Define HMI Alarm Server Complete the steps starting on page 135 4 Prepare XML Import File You have two options to build the XML import file e Quick Build e Custom Build We recommend that you use the Quick Build default options to create the XML import files For optional tag configurations as shown in the flow chart see Custom Build on page 151 Quick Build The ME alarms import file uses the following default build settings e Discrete alarms are only added e All Logix tags in the
6. Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the MMC Maintenance tab to make adjustments to device parameters troubleshoot and temporarily work around device problems and disable the device for routine maintenance The MMC Maintenance tab is divided into two tabs Maintenance Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the MMC Maintenance tab shows the following information e The Hand feedback value e Autotune buttons for CV1 CV2 and CV3 e High and low alarms e Operator inputs for high and low alarms positive and negative rate of change override and target value MMC _ z l D 2 SP1 SPE Cv1 CVv2 Cv3 Allow SP to track High Alarm 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 PY in manual mode Low Alarm 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Autotune C1 CV RoC Pos 0 00 0 00 0 00 CY RoC Neg 0 00 0 00 0 00 Autotune C2 Override Value 0 00 0 00 0 00 Hand Feedback Value 0 00 0 00 0 00 W Autotune C3 Target Value 0 00 0 00 0 00 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 221 Appendix F 222 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The following table shows the functions of page 1 of the Maintenance tab Table 65 MMC Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Function Allow SP to track PV Check to enable SP to track PV in manual mode This is ignored when in Auto modes SP tracks PV only when all three outputs are in manual As soon as any outp
7. Operator Tab The IMC faceplate initially opens to the Operator Home tab From here an operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator mode The IMC Operator tab shows the following information Requested modes indicator Current ratio multiplier Current Program multiplier Current Process Variable and bar graph Current Control Variable and bar graph Current Set Point High H and Low L clamping limits for the PV Input Status Communications OK Communications Fail Bad PV Quality or Uncertain PV Quality Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Operator Mode Command Button Requested Modes Indicator _ _ gt Current Loop Mode Indicator Auto Loop Mode Command Button 7 E0 5E 0 00 Ratio 1 00 Cascade Loop Mode Command Button gt Cz Manual Loop Mode Command Button M 3r 50 0 00 Input Status Indicator _ gt T Fo operator Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Program Mode Command Button a e 100 00 F o T PV Indicator P Ba SP Slider Oo B p lt 0 00 CV Indicator E a es Gey ae eat at ed g U 100 L 0 00 P CV Min Max EU H 100 00 The following table lists the functions on of the Operator tab Table 55 IMC Operator Tab Description Function Operator Setpoint Value ha O
8. R amp BAS P_DOut Graphics Library ggfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 48 KB z Er L RA BAS P_Motor Graphics Library ggfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 343 KB s _ RA BAS P_Motor2Spd Graphics Library 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 360 KB Premier Integrz TEA L RA BAS P_MotorHO Siaphics elte 6 28 2013 8 00AM GGFX ile 333 KB Graphics _ RA BAS P_MotorRev Graphics Library g 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 359 KB eT View ME RA amp BAS P_nPos Graphics Library ggf 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 412 KB FTview SE le RA BAS P_PID Graphics Library ggfx 1 21 2014 10 00 AM GGFX File 491 KB q er _ RA BAS P_ValveMP Graphics Library ggf 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 195 KB aoe I L RA BAS P_VSD Graphics Library ggfx 1 21 2014 10 00 AM GGFX File 388 KB a _ RA BAS Process Alarm Objects ggfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 116 KB MCR q _ RA BAS Process Faceplate Analog Obje 1 21 2014 10 00 4M GGFX File 353 KB fRA RAS Process Farenlate Mise Ohierts 1 27 9014 10 0 AM GGF File 201 KR File name RA BAS Common Faceplate Objects ggfx RA BAS P_Aln Graphics Library ggfx RA BAS P Global Graphic Displays gfo v 6 Click Ctrl A to highlight all the global object ggfx files 7 Click Open to import the objects 74 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 How to Install the Library Chapter 2 Import HMI Faceplates Faceplates provide operators maintenance workers en
9. Alarm and Events P_Alarm EJ Alarm Inp Val_MinToUnshelve D Inp_Reset Val_SecToUnshelve D Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM002 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 41 Chapter1 Overview Table 9 Cross Functional Process Object Description Object Elements Common Mode Block P_ Mode Mode Totem Pole The P_ Mode instruction is used to provide selection of the Mo O mode owner of an instruction or control strategy Use this instruction if you are creating an Add On Instruction for a device that requires Add On Instruction separate acquisition by an operator and program logic or a that supports Override or Hand capabilities or that needs a a Inp_Hand Gts Hand separate Maintenance mode z Sts Maint ats Ovrd sts Prog sts Oper ats ProgOperLock Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM005 Operator Prompt P_Prompt Global Object Faceplate Sequencer racking Example Prompt mij J The P_Prompt instruction iS a OL Manual Take a sample to the lab Enter results and comments x generic mechanism for Parameter Values Selection Options operator interaction that can be Viscosity Min 120 00 cP Pass used for any task The Viscosity Max 163 00 cP Fail 7 Temperature Min 110 00 deg C Instruction prompts an Add On Instruction Temperature Max 116 00 deg C operator for some type of information message or data
10. D D Stop Totalizer n P Bump Flow Check Tolerances Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 59 Chapter1 Overview Quick Displays Quick displays provide means for operators to perform simple interactions with Add On Instruction instances From the Quick Display you can navigate to the faceplate for full access for operation maintenance and configuration Basic Analog Input Advanced Analog Input P_Aln P_AlnAdv a e ar Baa E BblDay Target 20 00 Refinery Flow Single speed Motor Two speed Motor P_Motor P_Motor2Spd Reactor 7 Yent Fan PROD 2FER PUMP P 1 ajale go Stopped gt m 60 Dual Sensor Analog Input P_AlnDual Bioreactor 1 z eal a af E E Hand operated Motor P_MotorH0 Final Effluent Agit Running Fast Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Multiple Analog Input P_AlnMulti Analog Input alg a s 100 EEN Reversing Motor P_MotorRev Fresh Leaf l PowerFlex 523 525 Drive P_PF52x Analog Pulsed Control Valve P_ValveC Analog alve a a et Cy 60 00 Solenoid operated Valve P_ValveSO Ingr 1 Block alve PowerFlex 753 Drive P_PF753 otor Speed Control Hand operated Valve P_ValveHO Station Inlet l Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM00
11. Securty Settings for Samples Water gt Cox eee Permission Effective Permissions View permissions By User Action Computers aP All Computers Remove Permissions for All Users from All Computers Acton Allow All Actions O Factory Talk View Security Codes OU K oO O K RK 3 Click Add to select an existing user or user group from the Select User and Computer dialog box The selection appears under the Users and Computers columns at the top of the Security Settings dialog box 4 Click the Allow checkbox beside the FactoryTalk View Security Codes that you want to allow permission for the selected account To select all of the codes A P click the Allow checkbox for All Actions or the checkbox next to FactoryIalk View Security Codes IMPORTANT Recommended settings for the Library do not use Deny which takes precedence over an explicit Allow 5 Click OK 6 Repeat step 3 through step 5 for each user or group account that you want to set up with Runtime Security Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Global Object Configuration Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 Graphic displays which consist of display elements graphic objects provide an operator with a visual run time outlook on a plant activity The displays show system or process data and provide operator s with a way to write values to external devices such as a controller For detai
12. Table 39 Long Integer Instructions Name Short Description Long Description File Name L_ABS Absolute Value 64 bit This instruction returns the absolute value positive magnitude of an input 64 bit L_ABS_1_0 00_AOI L5X integer LINT value L_ADD Add 64 bit Adds two LINT signed 64 bit values and returns a LINT signed 64 bit sum L_ADD_1_0 00_AOI L5X Also provides math status bits for Carry Negative Overflow and Zero result equivalent to built in S C S N S V 8 2 L_AND Bitwise AND 64 bit This instruction returns the bitwise Logical and output bit true if both corresponding L_AND_1_0 00_AOI L5X input bits true of two input 64 bit integers LINTs into an output 64 bit integer L_ DEC Decrement 64 bit This instruction decrements the input 64 bit integer returning its value minus 1 L_DEC_1_0 00_AOI L5X L DIV Divide 64 bit by 32 bit This instruction implements an elementary school shift subtract looping method of L_DIV_1_0 00_AOI L5X dividing a 64 bit integer LINT dividend by a 32 bit integer DINT divisor The resulting quotient is a 64 bit integer LINT and the remainder 32 bit integer DINT is also returned L_EQU Equal 64 bit This instruction compares two LINT 64 bit signed integer variables L_EQU_1_0 01_AOI L5X If Inp_A is equal to Inp_B EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 L_FtoH Float to Half Precision This instruction converts a 32 bit s
13. controller 66 HMI 66 text software considerations 109 tool alarms builder 127 online configuration 121 TOT faceplates 255 Index totalizer built in instructions 255 triggers alarms 154 U upload tag configuration 122 usage color utility 160 library documentation 13 utility color change 159 color palette usage 160 V visualization files import 72 X xandy positioning 107 XML AE file build options 143 import files 136 ME build options 156 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 265 Index Notes 266 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs You can also visit our Support Center at https rockwellautomation custhelp com for software updates support chats and forums technical information FAQs and to sign up for product notification updates In addition we offer multiple support programs for installation configuration and troubleshooting For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com services online phone Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first
14. scaled in PV units SP is set to this value when in Operator control Type the SP maximum and minimum limits Click to enable CV Tracking when autotune is OFF This parameter is ignored in Hand and Override mode Normal Operation of Devices Code A RatioOper RatioHLimit RatioLLimit Configuration and Tuning Maintenance Code D Normal Operation of Devices Code A SPOper SPHLimit SPLLimit Configuration and Tuning Maintenance Code D Equipment Maintenance Code C PVTracking 205 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Maintenance Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the Maintenance tab shows the following information e Error value in PV units e Current process variable PV e Setpoint value in PV units e PV percent of span e PV percent of span e Error percent of span Error PV Units Error deg Bx 1 2 0 01 PY deg Bx SP deg Bx Current PV laia laia Setpoint PV Units PW EU Min Max PV Span a 100 00 Autotune 0 00 7 CY 12 12 30 Peale es PV Span Autotune CV Button p Error o 01 Error Span Tuning Gain 0 5600 Time Constant 6 5000 Seconds gt Dead Time 18 5000 Seconds gt RTC 0 3333 mo ceee Calculated CV see next page The following table shows the functions of page 2 of the IMC Maintenance tab Table 57 IMC Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description PV EU Min Max Type the minimum or ma
15. 1 Right click Macro and select Add Component Into Application E Add Component Into Project Ow u Files Process Objects Library Graphics amp FlView SE MCR Search MER p Organize New folder _ s 7 E saved Garmes Marne Date modified Type SIze ie Searches on _ _ _ _ NavToObjectimer 4 3 2014 100 AM MCR File 2 KB JE Computer Se cad Floppy Disk Dri amp Local Disk C 2g DVD Drive Ds Ciu Network T E Control Panel E Recycle Bin m Mewlristall 5 Ub v3 1 02 di Documents I Files di Graphics for E di Logix Diagno File name NavToObject mcr Macro Files rmnicr Open Cancel 2 Select the NavloObject mcer file and click Open 76 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 How to Install the Library Chapter 2 Factorylalk View ME Configuration For FactoryTalk View ME configurations only follow these steps to import HMI tags so you can switch between tabs on the faceplates 1 From the Tools pull down menu choose Tag Import and Export Wizard FactoryTalk Tiew Studio Yew achine Edition Fie View Application Tools Window Help E Geb 5 O cap Diagnostics Setup Explorer METO Sam Diagnostics Wewer 9 Local TEMPTS ts ME O_Saenph Tag lmpwt ard Export Warg F METO Sa H Srtem Back Cancel Help 2 From the Operation pull down m
16. Decimal LI LI 1 0Cmd_Stop av Read w ite Decimal_ L L 1 New Oper mot Read wrte Vlotor has Run Feedback Decimal LI L 1 0veride ignore Read wiite Cfg_ShedOnrl im Cig_ShedOrF Decimal L I 1 5top Motor an Read Write Ploaersuramicanmande umantecaint Decimal _ J Cig HasFailT Decimal 1 Fail to Start Ala Ciq_HasFailT Decimal 1 Fail to Stop Ala Read Write Operator command resets fault pe fi ig il ey em et PN eee 4 Ti aas Jf Enable navigation to permissive abject Move Up Move Down Jf Enable navigation to interlock object Copy all default values of parameters and local tags whose values were modified to all tags of this instruction type en Apply Enable navigation to overload object Jf Enable navigation to restart inhibit object Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 119 Chapter4 Use the Library Notes 120 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Before You Begin Appendix A Online Configuration Tool The Online Configuration Tool is a stand alone Microsoft Excel based spreadsheet The multi tabbed spreadsheet lets you access configuration tags of Library objects Add On Instruction parameters and local tags for multiple instances of a library instruction simultaneously by using OPC IMPORTANT The Configuration Tool is supported only in 32 bit editions of Microsoft Excel
17. FactoryTalk Alarm and Event server status is sent to the bits identified for the tags above 3 Click OK Add Digital Alarm Control Tags The Control Tags configuration lets the FactoryTalk Alarm and Event server to access alarm acknowledgment disable enable shelve and unshelve actions performed via the faceplates and suppress and unsuppress actions performed in controller logic Some of the status bits are reused as control bits with the single INT Com_AE tag to reduce the number of tags and elements on scan in the Factorylalk Alarm and Event server 1 From the Alarms Properties dialog box click the Control Tags tab 96 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 The Control Tags dialog box appears Digital Alarm Properties Digital Status Tags Disable Tag Enable Tag Suppress Tag Unsuppress Taq Acknowledge Tags All Levels Shelve Tags All Levels Shelve Duration Unshelve All Tag LO 2 Complete the Field Disable Tag Auto Reset Enable Tag Auto Reset Suppress Tag Auto Reset Unsuppress Tag Auto Reset Acknowledge Tags All Levels Auto Reset Shelve Tags All Levels Auto Reset Shelve Duration Unshelve All Tags 3 Click OK f Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_4E 5 7 e Control Tags Auto Reset i Mix P50_Motor FailToStart cCom_AE 10 i Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 11 j t Mix P50_Motor F
18. November 2014 73 Chapter2 How to Install the Library Import Global Object Files Global objects serve two purposes e Faceplate objects files contain common elements that are used in building faceplate displays e Graphics Library files contain device symbols that you can use to build your application displays Clicking the symbol opens the corresponding faceplate display 1 Right click Global Objects and choose Add Component Into Application 5 Graphics H ag Displays Global OF ration The Add Component Into Project dialog box appears 2 Browse to your downloaded Rockwell Automation Library files 3 Click the Graphics folder 4 Click the FactoryTalk View SE or FactoryTalk View ME folder depending on your application 5 Click the Global Objects folder Add Component Into Project G gt Files Process Objects Library Graphics FTview SE Global Objects Search Global Objects Organize v New folder Fil EI Programs 7 Name j Date modified Type Size T a System and Sec i RE User detoun L RA BAS Common Faceplate Objects ggfx 1 21 2014 10 00 AM GGFX File 303 KB E Recycle Bin L RA BAS P_Aln Graphics Library ggfx 1 21 2014 10 00 AM GGFX File 413 KB Fles __ RA BAS P_D4SD Graphics Library ggfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 265 KB Graphics for B _ RA BAS P_D4SD Motor Graphics Library 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GGFX File 329 KB Lease biagnast
19. P_PF753 P_PF755 P_SMC50 P_SMCFlex P_VSD Motor objects including P_ Motor P_Motor2Spd P_MotorRev P_PF52x P_PF753 P_PF755 P_SMC50 P_SMCFlex P_VSD Valve objects including e P_ValveMO e P_ValveSO I 0 Processing objects including e P_Aln e P_AlnAdv e P_AlnDual e P_AlnMulti Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Table 34 P_Alarm Types by Library Objects Alarm Type HiDev HiHi HIHIDev HiRoC IntlkTrip lOFault Lo LockFail Alarm Description PV exceeds SP by High threshold Threshold is set by Operator or Program Deadband gating timing and severity are set in configuration PV above High High threshold Threshold is set by Operator or Program Deadband gating timing and severity are set in configuration PV exceeds SP by High High threshold Threshold is set by Operator or Program Deadband gating timing and severity are set in configuration Absolute value of PV rate of change above High Rate of Change limit Limit set by Operator or Program Deadband and severity in configuration Triggered when an Interlock not OK causes the device to transition state Triggered by the Inp_lOFault Input and used to indicate an 1 0 communication failure PV below Low threshold Threshold is set by Operator or Program Deadband gating timing and severity are set in configuration A device with a locking or sealing feature was commanded to a new position b
20. Reference Manual a Table of Contents LF Preface EHP Multiple Analog Input P_AlInMulti LP Guidelines LF Functional Description if Required Files LP Controller Code if Operations LF Programming Example LF Display Elements if Quick Display LF Faceplate LP Back Cover Guidelines Explains when to use this instruction and alternative Add On instructions for situations that do not apply for this instruction Functional Description Provides details on how the instruction operates to acquaint you with the instruction s capabilities Required Files Includes the controller and visualization files that you must import into your project to use this instruction Controller Code Describes the input and output parameters and local configuration tags for controller configuration and maintenance Operations Describes primary operations for Add On Instructions including modes alarms and simulation Programming Example selected manuals Illustrates the use of the instruction for a better understanding of the instruction s logic Display Elements Depicts the display elements to aid in choosing the ones that you need Quick Display A small screen that lets operators perform simple interactions with the respective instruction From the Quick Display you can navigate to the faceplate for full access for operation maintenance and configuration Faceplate Explains how to use and understand the facep
21. a L_Redun_SwitchoverMSGCtrl H E L_Redun_SyncMSGCtrl a Pot tvrotor y H E Program MainPragram Alm _IOFault ReadWrite i Program Tank_T20 Cfg_AllowLocal ReadWrite H E Station_Intlk amp Cfg_FailToStart4ckR Read Write a Station_Reset amp Cfg_FailToStartReset ReadWrite a T_Sync_Instance Cfg_FailToStartSever ReadWrite H E T_Sync_NTPData Cfg_FailToStartT ReadWrite H E T_Sync_SockCreate ci Refresh All Folders Tag filter Selected Tag Mix P50_Motor Alm_FailT oStart Home area 5 In the left pane of the Tag Browser click the folder representing the Add On Instruction instance Our example is P50_ Motor Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 99 Chapter 3 100 Common Configuration Considerations You can use the folder for the offline controller If you are connected to the actual hardware controller on a network and the controller application is leaded you can use the online folder 6 In the right pane of the Tag Browser double click the alarm status parameter for the alarm TIP The alarm status parameter s name starts with Alm_ For example the parameter is Alm_FailToStart The alarm status parameter appears in the Trigger pop up window Trigger ES Mix P50 Motor Alm FailT oStart a aes 7 Click OK The alarm status parameter appears in the Select trigger box of the Alarm Setup dialog box El Alarm setu
22. dh Other Add On Ma Breadcrumb_MaintBypass png Ma CmdBtnFace_EnergizeRdyActive png Ma CmdBtnFace_SelectExecPressed png c Ji Premier Integre Ma Breadcrumb_MaintReq png R CmdBtnFace_EnergizeReady png Ma CmdBtnFace_SelectExecRdyActive png CE dh Process Object Ma CrmdBtnFace AutoPressed png Ma Crd BtnFace_MaintPressed png Ma Crd BtnFace_SelectExecReady png mc di Graphics i Ma CrmdBtnFace_AutoReady png R CmdBtnFace_MaintReady png R CmdBtnIcon_Acknowledge png CE di FTview ME Ma CmdBtnFace_CascadePressed png Ma CmdBtnFace_ManualActionPressed png m CmdBtnIcon_Acknowledge_Disabled png CE d FTView SE Ma CmdBtnFace_CascadeReady png R CmdBtnFace_ManualActionRdyActive png R CmdBtnIcon_AlarmDisable png CE Ji Images Ma CmdBtnFace_ClosePressed png Ma CmdBtnFace_ManualActionReady png Ma CmdBtnIcon_AlarmDisable_Disabled png DOR r Dy Process Add ford PNG Images png Cancel Filename Alarm_AckRequired png Slarm_Exception png Alarm_Fault png Alarm_Info png Alarm_In IMPORTANT You need to change the path to the image folder and the file type to PNG PNG files provide more control with transparency 6 Click the pull down menu as circled and select a file type For example PNG Images png 7 Click Ctrl A to highlight all of the png files 8 Click Open to import the images Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P
23. png files in the images folder All png files in the images folder These are the common icons used in the global objects and faceplates for all Process Objects HMI Tags FTVME_PlantPAxLib_Tags_3_1_00 csv These tags must be imported into the FactoryTalk View ME project to support switching tabs on any Process Object faceplate 1 The service release number boldfaced can change as service revisions are created Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 255 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions TOT Totalizer Ee ProgProgRheg OldT otal C m ProgOperReg ProgOper m H ProgStatReg RunStop fe o ProgStapReg FrogResetDone E _ amp ProgResetReq TargetFlag TargetDeviFlag TargetDev2Flag GO_BuiltIn_TotalizerTgt1 GO_BuiltIn_TotalizerTgt2 GO_BuiltIn_Totalizerlgt3 GO BuiltIn_ Totalizer GO_Builtln_Totalizer1 GO BuiltIn_ Totalizer2 256 Display Elements A display element global object is created once and can be referenced multiple times on multiple displays in an application When changes are made to the original base object the instantiated copies reference objects are automatically updated Use of global objects in conjunction with tag structures in the ControlLogix system aid consistency and save engineering time lescriptions Display Element Description Totalizer with target vertical orientation top Fal Running Flow ri o 5 5 FH
24. 02_RUNG L5X te P_E3000vld_3_1 02_A01LL5X P_E3000vid_3_1 02 RUNG L5OX te P_Fanout_3_1 01_AOLL5X E P_Gate_3_1 01_ AOLLSX fe P_HiLoSel_3_1 01_A01LL5x te P_Intlk_3_1 01_A01LL5X H P_Logic_3_1 01_ AO1LL5xX E P_Mode_3 1 01 AOLL5X t P_Motor_3_1 02_A0LL5x E P_Motor2 Spd_3_1 02_A01L5x E P_MotorHO_3_1 02_AOLL5X E P_MotorRev_3_1 02_AOLL5X Network File name P_Motor_3_1 02_A01 L5x Files of type FSLogix 5000 XML Files L5 Files containing Add On Instruction Into Add On Instructions TIP ex P_nPos_3_1 02_A0LL5x P_Perm_3_1 01_A0LL5X P_PF52x_3_1 02_AOLL5X H P_PF52x_3_1 02_RUNG L5X P_PF753_3_ 1 02 AOLL5X H P_PF753_3_1 02_RUNG L5X P_PF755_3 1 02 AOLL5X H P_PF755_3_1 02_RUNG L5X P_PIDE_3_1 02_A0LL5X P_PIDE_only_3_1 01_AOLL5 IE P_PTComp_3_1 01_401LL5x P_Reset_3_1 01_AOLL5X P_ResInh_3_1 01_A401LL5X P_RunTime_3_1 01_A01LL5X The P_ Mode P_ Alarm and P_ Gate Add On Instructions are used within many of the other instructions We recommend that you import these three instructions first Some Add On Instructions are provided in RUNG import files TIP If a RUNG import file is provided import the rung into a Ladder Diagram routine to get all the required additional tags data types and Message configurations Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 67 Chapter2 How to Install the Library 4 On the Import Configuration dialog box click OK z Jaa iano
25. 143 Appendix B 144 Alarms Builder Tool 5 Save XML Import File This section describes how to use Factorylalk View Studio software to implement the XML file to import alarms into the PlantPAx system Follow these steps after opening the FactoryIalk View Studio software 1 From the FactoryTalk View Studio Explorer tree configuration right click the AE alarm server and choose Import and Export Explorer xj Erg Network LOCALHOST fy PlariPAx Demo amp Runtime Secuty GE PlantPAx CGH Ares cE CGN Sub rea SH PlartPAs CGN Ea System Es Commar 4 HMI Tags The Alarm Import Export Wizard Operation Type dialog box appears Alarm Import Export Wizard Operation Type x Select the operation bo perlo Export slam configurstion to Excel file Export slam configuration to ML fie C impt alarm configuration irom Excel file mpcet alarn configuration rom ML fie 2 Click Import alarm configuration from XML file and click Next You are importing the XML file that you created with QuickBuild on page 136 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B The Alarm Import Export Wizard File to Import dialog box appears 3 Click Browse to find where you saved the file on page 137 4 Select the import file and click Open The name of your XML file displays in the import file location text box
26. Alarm Import Files from the Help menu as explained on page 127 7 Click Next Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 139 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool Secced Sossedi Zeesed i Uie PlantPAx DisplayMap B Associate Alarm Tags to HMI Displays This option lets you automatically add a user defined macro mcrAE_Display DisplayName to the AE alarm tag s View command string Display Name is the name of the HMI display associated to the AE tag You can configure the macro to open the HMI display directly or to access a faceplate that has a button to open a display The Associate HMI Displays to Alarm Tags dialog box has two panes The functionally is the same as for the Select and Organize Alarm Tags dialog box explained on page 139 a Associate HMI Displays to Alarm Tags ole Em EY ov_Motors E Pumps BP ov_Next 3 6 Unassigned Tags BH ov_nPos EA EAL_P3 Pump P3 Motor Power ov_PID EA FAL_P3 Pump P3 Flow Switch FA ov_QuickGroupSandbox EA FI_2 BP ov_Sequencer EA FIC_P3 FY ov_SMCs DA Faic_2 BH ov_Testbed EA FOIC_2_ChanRate Bt ov Valves a Re P s Admin Bt P s Alarm Explorer Bt P s Alarm HistoryDisplay Bt P s Alarm ShelvedDisplay Bt P s Alarm Summary Be P s System Bt P s VButtonBar Lan 4 E mi 2 Add x Files to Current Folder Current HMI Display none Current Folder P
27. Bl awww Idle gt mai H ONE Built in Quick Displays The following Quick Displays provide access to faceplates that are designed to work with built in instructions Internal Model Control Modular Multivariable Control IMC MMC MMC eo 7 a Sr s nT PV1 oor Pfau sr CT v2 MC E 5 gt E S x i 12 i7 o 0 07 PY 2eu oe e g o H CA H a Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 63 Chapter1 Overview Built In PIDE 64 Proportional Integral Derivative PIDE x il TE sp 40 53 Ma 40 53 pv MEE Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Chapter 2 How to Install the Library This chapter describes procedures for installing the HMI and controller elements that comprise the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects There are two methods e Using predefined application templates e Importing individual library objects If you are starting a new project it is recommended that you begin from our Quick Start application templates The Quick Start manual guides you through the necessary steps to install the library components and provides guidance on configuring basic system diagnostics For details see the PlantPAx System Application Templates Quick Start publication PROCES QS001 The table describes the topics in this chapter Topic Page Dow
28. Check to enable CV Tracking when Equipment VTrackReq autotune is OFF Maintenance This parameter is ignored in Hand and Code C Override mode 208 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Engineering Tab The Engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges options for device and I O setup displayed text and faceplate to faceplate navigation settings for initial system commissioning or later system changes The Engineering tab is divided into two pages Engineering Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the Engineering tab has various Operator inputs options for the CV Cascade Ratio mode and Windup CV Allow Cascade Ratio Mode Model Gain units Use ratio control when in Cascade Ratio EU mode m Limit C in Manual Mode Place instruction in Manual rode while CYlnitializing is set Reset Program Inputs after each execution Windup Aigh C Y not allowed to increase Windup Low CY not allowed to decrease The following table shows the functions of page 1 of the IMC Engineering tab Table 59 IMC Engineering Tab Page 1 Description Allow Cascade Check if Cascade Ratio mode is to be used Engineering AllowCasRat Ratio Mode IMPORTANT Checking this option Configuration displays the Cascade button on the Code E Operator tab See Operator Tab on page 187 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002
29. Dual Probe ola meee al ef 14 m79 nh SM m Substitute a pH 6 87 o _ L 58 LL 59 EAE 7 00 6 87 6 93 7 00 6 87 AlT 101 B 4 0 13 AIT 101 A Table 3 1 0 Processing Process Object Description Multiple Analog Input P_AlnMulti The P_AlnMulti instruction monitors one analog process variable PV by using up to eight analog input signals sensors transmitters input channels Use this instruction if you want to display a temperature or other process variable by averaging multiple measurements Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM026 Discrete Input Object P_DIn The P_DIn instruction is used to receive and process a single discrete condition typically for a channel of a discrete input card It can be used with any discrete BOOL signal You can use this instruction to display the state of a process temperature level flow proximity pressure or other switch Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM003 Discrete Output P_DOut The P_DOut instruction controls a device by using a single discrete output signal and monitors feedback from the device to check for device failures This instruction operates in a variety of modes and can provide steady single pulsed or continually pulsed output The P_DOut instruction can be a good choice for pilot lights or stack lights that require blinking Click t
30. E ChangeDet_DTMsgDest H E ChangeDet_DTMsgSrc HE EAL_P3 Retresh All Folders Tagfilter EEE Selected Tag pea o amp 1PELT_R Readwrite amp L Redun Readwrite amp L Redun Readwrite Home area Cancel Help Es 5 Click Refresh All Folders Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 115 Chapter4 Use the Library 6 Expand the shortcut for the project controller and then click Online 4 Tag Browser x Select Tag Folders Contents of CL Slota Online PlantPAxLibrary3 A CL _Slot1 AE Horn Readwrite Ai CLx_Slot2 amp GE Horn Readyyrite Eb dvaggostic Items amp AE Horn Read Write is amp AE Horn Readyrite ChangeDet LPBLT_R ReadWrite H ChangeDet_ELMsgCtrl L Fedin Readwrite Bi ChangeDet_CLMsgDest i e ii eee H ChangeDet_CLMsgSrc 2 Aai H E ChangeDet_csmsgcctrl eens Roa Aa H E ChangeDet_CSMsgDest A OPBELT peace H E ChangeDet_CSMsgSrc SN MSG Readwrite H E ChangeDet_DTMsgCtrl 4 SYS_BLINK Readwrite H E ChangeDet_DTMsaDest H E ChangeDet_DTMsaSrc H E EAL_P3 Refresh All Folders Tag filter None gt Selected Tag Home area Cancel Help VE 7 Expand and scroll down the Online menu to select the tag for the Add On Instruction The backing tag for the Add On Instruction is a folder Tag Browser ae ajx Select Tag Folders Contents of CL Slot
31. Global Object Add On Instruction internal models and tuning The CC function block is a ce flexible model based algorithm py 017 deg BX that can be used in various configurations SP 46 00 deg Bx Click the links to access e faceplates in Appendix F e Reference Manual publication 1756 RM006 F sari EEC FES oa mmm N C OC C A C B C E C B C A E D E B E G E oe oy N L m m 7 SO Bee Be ee FR A eee eS ee ime a Te Wil ler le He Se i a a ae es er eT ae ee N a E po 2 a 46 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Table 12 APC Function Blocks Process Object Description Object Elements Internal Model Control IMC Global Object Faceplate The IMC function block controls a single process variable by manipulating a single control variable output This function block performs an algorithm where the actual error signal is compared against that of an internal IMC IMC pn A py 12 17 deg Bx K Wwe A vo O Oe A 0 Add On Instruction ia oo naco s EE first order lag plus deadtime TOUSEN al model of the process The IMC Pv evEUD a SP Pro ae atio 1 00 function block calculates the scame moea ie 100 i0 control variable output CV in RatioPiog Caskets Ky 100 P the Auto mode based on the ed ot Bie oe PV SP deviation internal i Steere o v io Y model and tuning Click the links to access e faceplates in Append
32. HH 5 5 ie fair Be i 5 5 Hit HHS Ke ete ee i Stopped Totalizer with target vertical orientation bottom Flowin q Totalizer with target vertical orientation right 2 8 stopped __ gees g OL Flowing Totalizer with target vertical orientation left ped HH HF S S oo gemo m ie Bu E Running Totalizer vertical orientation top Flowing 2 5 HH HHS iy wee ee L Totalizer vertical orientation bottom Far Running Flowin o Totalizer vertical orientation right z S Running 4 S S m Hit S 5 Flowing Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Table 85 Totalizer TOT Display Element Descriptions Display Element Name Display Element Description GO BuiltIn_ Totalizer3 Totalizer vertical orientation left gi o a ped HE p E Ue ving ie Hit S 8 a Operator Tab The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator Home tab From here an operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator mode Operator Mode Command Button Program Mode Command Button Current Mode Indicator ig bf i Blue Large Deviation Pre Target Indicator Green Small Deviation Pre Target Indicator Remaining ta Deliver 202 75 Onions Cluantity Delivered 797 22 Onions Reset Totalizer Delivery Rate 11 11 Onoins Da Command Button a
33. Instruction P_Steam_ph oma Steam Properties p h g Inp_P O Inp_h Out_Region O Out_Temperature D Out_Volume A Sts_InpErr E Sts_OutEr H Add On Instruction P_Steam_ps Steam Properties p s g Inp_P Ci Inp_s Out_Region D Out_Temperature O Out _Volume A Sts_InpErr A Sts_OutErr E Chapter 1 39 Chapter1 Overview Cross Functional 40 Table 9 Cross Functional Process Object Description Condition Gate Delay P_ Gate The P_Gate instruction provides a gate for a discrete signal and provides on delay and off delay timing for the gated signal This instruction is used within P_DIn all analog inputs and P_PIDE for threshold and target disagree Status processing When the gate input is true the input is passed through to the output by using on delay and off delay timing When the gate input is false the output is kept off Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM041 Interlocks with First Out and Bypass P_Intlk The P_Intlk instruction is used to collect sum up the interlock conditions that stop or de energize a running or energized piece of equipment or prevent it from starting or being energized Interlocks are always evaluated to de energize equipment Use this instruction if you want configurable text descriptions of shutdown conditions or other features of the P_Intlk faceplate Click the link to access the Reference
34. New folder ET fa Desktop 4 Name Date modified a ne d cache 10 8 2013 10 01 AM File Folder ad Active d comprf 10 8 2013 9 52 4M File Folder J mage B DiGLos 10 8 2013 10 24AM File folder D me i prts 10 8 2013 9 52 AM File folder Ji Quick D eps 10 8 2013 9 52 4M File folder di se Di Gfx 1 28 20145 33PM File Folder ae d gfx_xml 10 8 2013 9 52 4M File Folder Xz Clier di Global Objects 10 8 2013 9 52 4M File Folder Con P Images 10 8 2013 9 52 AM File folder J Face D KEY 10 8 2013 9 52 AM File folder Ji Face J LNG 10 8 2013 9 52 4M File Folder Ji Hmi J Local 10 8 2013 9 52AM File folder an x i d Mcr 10 8 2013 9 52 AM File Folder RF Ef D paR 1RN 9 57 4M File folder a File name Logixview LVU_MosquitoStations V3 xmp 0 Save as type xm files xml amp Hide Folders Cancel A 4 Typea file name and click Save If the file name is an existing file a warning message box appears File Exists Overwrite or Append 7 i x b The target XML File C Documents and SettingsiAll Users Documents RSview Enterprise SE HMI ProjectsiLvU MosquitoStations VS Logixview LVL MosquitoStatio nsa wml already exists Do you want bo overwrite or append to the File Note that ME deletes all current alarms when importing an XML file IF vou want to keep the existing ME alarms you should export the alarms to an 8ML File and then append to that ML file Click YES to overwrite Click WO to append Click CANCEL to exit V
35. Operator romt Response Values and accepts operator input Seq_101_Prome ae 4 A P Proret isposition data and confirmation Ree Viscosity 115 00 cP Click the link to access the Reference Manual RespData Seq_101_RegonseData SYSLIB RM046 Temperature 116 00 deg C v Boolean Logic with Snapshot Global Object Faceplate P_Logic The P_Logic instruction e executes up to eight gates of configurable Boolean logic Vessel 2 Empty Each gate provides up to four EET input conditions Gate types AOOO PNSLrUGUDA l Consumer 1 Short available include AND OR XOR Poges E Exclusive OR Set Reset deg edie gt e Select and Majority igs Sains Consumer 3 Short 2 Inp_3 Sts_GateLive es me esl Override State o Click the link to access the hl eee Mpa Override Switch o Reference Manual Imo Hata Inp_Rese P Logi SYSLIB RM027 42 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Notes Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 43 Chapter1 Overview Diagnostic Objects 44 These objects provide diagnostic information and statistics for Logix controllers to maximize system performance Table 10 Diagnostic Objects Process Object Description Logix Change Detector L_ChangeDet The L_ChangeDet instruction monitors another Logix controller on the network checking for ch
36. P_PIDE and the Dosing faceplates Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM042 Object Elements Global Object F N o0 M Add On Instruction P_Aln ell Analog Input Val Val InpR Wal_HiHiLim Wal_HiLim Val LoLim Val LoLoLim sts Err Add On Instruction P_AlChan Al Analog Input Channel Inp_Raw Val_InpRaw D Inp_ModFault Val D Inp_ChanF ault Sts_PVGood amp Sts_PVYUncertain Sts_PVBad Sts_Uselnp Sts_HoldLast Sts_Clamped Sts_Replaced f Sts_MaintReqd Sts_Err There are no dedicated display elements for this instruction Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplate Analog Input f al yL m A M o a EY l Z HH 90 100 E Resh Mi Substitute i 10 44 e 12 2 LL 5 P Aln Faceplate Analog Channel Quality fom e ae E Home Operator Ka as Fal fe LI H 20 73333 Raw P from Input a 9 91513 104 mA DC gt L 3 666667 15 Table 3 1 0 Processing Process Object Description Advanced Analog Input P_AlnAdv The P_AlnAdv instruction monitors one analog value typically from an analog input I 0 module This instruction has the following advanced features that are not included in the basic analog input e Square root scaling to provide positive or negative flow values e Calculation of the PV rate of change and configurable high rate of change a
37. RA BAS Common Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME Common Faceplate Objects Common global objects used on all Process Objects Object faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Faceplate Objects Global objects used on PIDE faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Graphics Librarys RA BAS ME BuiltIn Graphics Librarys Builtin display elements used to build process graphics RA BAS Builtin Help Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Help Objects Builtln global objects used for all BuiltIn help displays Graphics Images All png files in the images folder All png files in the images folder These are the common icons used in the global objects and faceplates for all Process Objects HMI Tags FTVME_PlantPAxLib_Tags_3_1_00 sy These tags must be imported into the FactoryTalk View ME project to support switching tabs on any Process Object faceplate 1 The service release number boldfaced can change as service revisions are created 232 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Display Elements A display element global object is created once and can be referenced multiple FIDE J times on multiple displays in an application When changes are made to the Enhanced PID original base object the instantiated copies reference objects are PY CVEU here sP automatically updated Use of global objects in conjunction with tag structures SPCascade
38. Reverse actin g E SP P Direct Acting E PY SP Timing execution mode Periodic Oversampling Real Time RTS Period ims Oversample At seconds 0 000 Elapsed time in seconds used to 125 calculate the process output The following table shows the functions of page 2 of the Engineering tab Table 78 PIDE Engineering Tab Page 2 Description Control Action Click to select the method of Engineering ControlAction Reverse acting calculating error Configuration E SP PV Code E Direct Acting E PV SP Timing execution Click to select the Timing execution mode TimingMode mode Periodic Oversampling Real Time Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 243 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Trends Tab The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time These faceplate trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement but not replace dedicated historical or live trend displays The Trends tab is divided into two pages Trends Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the PIDE Trends tab shows the relationship between PV IBU and SP for the same time frame of a process Built In PIDE q NET Prt Ei i a gt mm PY IBU ma SP 100 00 Blue SP 75 00 50 00 Green PV oo ee eel 2 23 18 PM Lea Lew Lad Ley Le Le Leo 244 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplat
39. S Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 Icerenk y Istanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication PROCES RMO002C EN P November 2014 Supersedes Publication PROCES RM002B EN P June 2014 Copyright 2014 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
40. Tags dialog box appears with two panes The left pane lists the controllers assigned to the HMI alarm server The right pane lets you create folders to organize selected tags a Select and Organize Alarm Tags 3 am S ProcessObjects_3_1_00 a oe a il Controller Scoped Tags DA EAL_P3 Pump P3 Motor Power EAL_P3 Pump P3 Motor Power 2 HA FAL_P3 Pump P3 Flow Switch fA FIC_P3 EA FI_2 DA FQIC_2 EA FQIC_2_ChanRate m FAL_P3 Pump P3 Flow Switch A FIC_P3 A Fi_2 A A FQIC_2 FQIC_2_ChanRate FQIC_P3 FY_P3 HC101 Motor M 101 SMCFlex Soft Starter HCY 2 H2 Tank 2 Discharge Block Valve IAH_P3 Pump P3 Overload Trip I _P1 I _P3 LI_2 M2 Main_Mixer101 MyBuiltIh_PIDE OA MyBuiltln PIDE1 a 4 uli p Te Ci eres ee Filter v Current Project Folder Pump Remove X Tags from Folders See Back Next Cancel 2 In the left pane check each tag checkbox that you want to use 3 Right click in the right pane and choose Add Folder The Add Project Folder dialog box appears 4 Type a folder name description is optional and click OK 5 With the folder selected in the right pane click the Add X Tags to Folder button in the left pane to carry over the selected tags to the folder 6 To remove tags from a folder check each tag checkbox and click the Remove X Tags from Folders button in the right pane TIP To filter tag conditions see Create
41. Yes Com_AE 9 Disabled from AE Status see Important on page 93 No Com_AE 10 Disable to AE Control No Yes Com_AE 11 Enable to AE Control No Yes Com_AE 15 As shown in the chart with Figure 6 by using a single INT Com_AE tag for the interface and bits for status and control the number of tags and elements on scan in the FactoryIalk Alarm and Event server are kept to a minimum Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 IMPORTANT Status and control bits for Suppress and Disable have been separated for Version 3 1 02 to improve FactoryTalk Alarm and Event import behavior If you update the P_Alarm Add On Instruction it is not necessary to modify an existing FactoryTalk Alarm and Event configuration However certain alarms can remain disabled following an alarm import It s important to make sure that this situation does not occur If you update to the new bit assignments shown in Figure 6 this situation does not occur but you must update the P_ Alarm Add On Instruction to the latest system version Adding a Digital Alarm Complete these steps to add a digital alarm 1 Open the Factorylalk View Studio software 2 In the Explorer window click Alarms and double click Alarm and Event Setup ni e Sas Alarms Alarm and Event Setup cL AS Lins ah eola The Alarm and Event Setup dialog box appears with the All Alarms tab mi 3 Click the New too
42. alarm server controllers with alarm definitions are used e ME tag is added to the XML file only if the Logix tags HasAlarm value is 1 e Logix tag s Cfg_Desc and Cfg_Label local string tag values are added to the ME alarm trigger message e All other ME parameters are configured based on the Logix data type alarm definition Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 149 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool Follow these steps to create the XML import file by using the default settings 1 Right click the alarm server name and from the pull down menu choose Build ME Alarms XML Import File gt Quick Build use default options 2 HMI Alarm Servers e AE1 a ft Change Controllers Associated with Alarm Server Rename Alarm Server Remove Alarm Server Build FactoryTalk A amp E Alarms XML Import File Build Pararneter File for AE Alarm Summary Filter Tree Build Pararneter File for AE Alarm Summary Filter Tree with Alarm Tag Names Compare Logix Tags with AE Configuration Build ME Alarms XML Import File gt Expand All Quick Build use default options Select Review ME Alarms A dialog box appears that explains the QuickBuild default build options 2 Click Yes after reading about the settings when the XML file is imported to the ME alarm database The SaveAs ME Alarms Import XML File dialog box appears HE SaveAs ME Alarms XML Imp
43. an analog input device network or other connection Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM021 Object Elements Heater ignition O Heater Ignition cale Factor comm im 2 wis eo Step 5 Repeat 3x x gt H f l tee 4 Li et N Add On Instruction wwo O OO D Pilot Closed ry a s Pilot Opened a i m Pilot A Main Closed a I Main Suy Simple Sequencer Main Opened i w Ignition Seq Pilot Lt i oO Simple Sequ o P_Seq Heater lt Out_00 Li w Inp_00 16 Kou 0 I Inp_01 oe Hout 023 i W Faut notiry Inp_02 1 Hou_03 ape w0 Inp_03 oe Xout_o4 Gp Fault Ack i Inp_04 oe Hou 053 i K Inp_05 0e eCOut_06 em oO Inp_06 oe Hou 073 i o Inp_07 0e HsSts_Seqde Inp_PermoK 16 H Sts_SeqStarting io Inp_NBPermOK 16 ng am o Inp_IntlkOK 16 i fo inp NBIntIKO K is e I Val_CurrStepNum oO Ref Steps Heater a 1234 6 7e3swH oO 144 98 Gallons Ed 0 05 GPM P_DoseFM Dosing with Flowmeter Out_RunFlow a Out_DribbleFlow Inp_CtridEqpF ault Out_StopFlow Inp_RateP Inp_QtyP Inp_Reset Sts Oper Global Object M 16384 Pounds 1 311 Pounds Add On Instruction P_DoseWS Dosing with Weigh Scale g Inp_WeightP Out_RunFlow a Inp_CtrldEqpFault Out_DribbleFlow f Inp_Reset Out_StopFlow E Sts_Maint 2 Sts_Prog Sts_Oper P Dosing with Flowmeter ALAA g Home Operator M 0
44. contains Version 3 0 instructions is updated with Version 3 1 instructions the tags retain their existing severity values 1 4 IMPORTANT _ For FactoryTalk View software version 8 and later the AE severity can be configured by using a Logix tag address The alarm server reads the severity from the Logix tag during runtime This function allows the severity value to be changed from the HMI faceplate no number mapping is required For FactoryTalk View software version 7 and earlier the AE severity value is a fixed numeric value It cannot be changed from the tag faceplate it can be changed only from the AE tag database Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 131 Appendix B 132 Alarms Builder Tool If you load a controller that has the P_Alarm Add On Instruction with Version 3 1 or later a prompt appears to let you use a tool to change severity tag values Update Logix Tag Severity Values One or more of the project controllers contains PlantPAx Process Library P_Alarm AOI Version 3 1 or higher The alarms severity values of PAX AOls have been changed to the range of 1 to 1000 in Version 3 1 In previous versions the alarm severity values are in the range of 1 to 4 Do you want to run a tool that would change all Logix tag severity values Note that this tool can be executed on demand at a later time by right mouse clicking on the Logix Controllers folder and selecting the Tag Se
45. details TIP The conversion of the controller project file to an XML format can take several minutes for each controller file When the conversion is complete the controller file is added to the configuration tree under Logix Controllers i PlantPAx Alarms Builder and Tag Data Edit Tool File Wiew Tools Windows Help D a Ef Logix Controllers o rl ProcessO bjects_3_1_00 E HMI Alarm Servers Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B 8 Repeat step 2 through step 5 to add multiple controllers to the project Multiple controllers can be associated to different HMI alarm servers For example you can have an AE alarm server for several controllers in a SE project and a ME alarm server for skid mounted controllers Replace Logix Tag Severity Values Use the procedures in this section if you have upgraded an ACD file with Rockwell Automation Library Add On Instructions Version 3 0 to Version 3 1 and want to change the severity values The severity values for the Version 3 1 instructions are now a range as shown in Table 38 Table 38 Logix Tag Severity Values Version 3 0 and earlier Version3 1 Definitions Alarm Color The Version 3 1 instruction range of 1 1000 INT data type is consistent with the default AE severity value range il wt N The Version 3 0 and earlier instructions have a severity range of 1 4 SINT data type When an ACD file that
46. downloaded Library zipped file 6 Click Open The Tag Import and Export Wizard dialog box reappears with the selected CSV file Tag Import and Export Wizard E Choose the FactoryTalk view CS Files you want to import Import Files o C Users Labuser Desktopi Process Library Files Process mma Tags Objects Library Graphics FT view ME Tags VETVME_PlantPAaxLib_Tag csy 7 Click Next Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 79 Chapter2 How to Install the Library The Tag Import and Export Wizard dialog box reappears Tag Import and Export Wizard 8 Use the Skip existing fastest option and click Next The Tag Import and Export Wizard dialog box reappears Click the Finish button to import the database Source C Users Labuser Desktop Process Library Files Process Objects Library Graphics FT view ME Tags FTVME_PlantP4xLib_Tag csy Destination C Users Public Documents RSS view Enterprise ME HMI projects MEFO_ Samples Seq S008 MEYO Samples Seq 3008 med Number of lines in import files Tags 11 lines Alarms O lines 9 Click Finish to import the HMI files 80 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 How to Install the Library Chapter 2 The FactoryIalk View Database Import dialog box appears with the information that the import is complete w FactoryTalk iew Database Import Oo x File Help INFORMATION Only new File ent
47. even if both are in use on the same computer You must set up security permissions twice once for the Local Directory and once for the Network Directory to give one user access to a local and a network distributed application on the same computer Add Users to Security Codes The following steps are for adding a user or group account to an existing FactoryIalk security account If you are adding a new user you must create the FactoryTalk account first and then add the account in the Runtime Security editor For procedures see the FactoryTalk View Site Edition User s Guide publication VIEW SE UMO006 1 From the Settings menu click Runtime Security File View Settings Tools Window Help Explorer The Runtime Security dialog box appears Runtime Security RNA Global Samples Water Lo KE Specify the Factory Talk Secunty accounts that will have runtime access to the FactoryT alk View SE application Click the Security Accounts button to add or remove an account and to assign A F secunty codes Click the browse buttone to select optional Login and Logout macros for the account Account ID ALL USERS Close Login Macro Prey Logout Macro z Hert Security Accounts Help 1 ALL USERS Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 105 Chapter 3 106 Common Configuration Considerations 2 Click Security Accounts The Security Settings dialog box appears
48. files into the FactoryTalk View software program 162 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Color Change Utility Appendix C There are bulk import files for the displays BatchImport_Displays_PlantPAx Library xml and global objects BatchImport_Global_OlantPAx Library xml Modifying the Color Palette The color palette appears in a tree format that shows a parent child relationship between colors Base Colors are shown with a color box next to them Reference Colors reference either a Base Color or another Reference Color By changing a Base Color all of the Reference Colors under it change For example you can create a generic Base Color called Energized and then reference it with the Reference Color called Running Color palette entries are not to be deleted unless they are known to be unused To see if a color palette entry is being used right click the color and choose Find Color Instances Any color palette entry Reference or Base Color can be moved to reference another color This is done by simply dragging the color to be moved and dropping it on the new color to reference When a color that has references is moved all of its references move as well A Reference Color can also be made a Base Color by right clicking the Reference Color and selecting Make Base Color from the context menu Color palette entries are stored with an integer code and that integer code
49. for vertical pipe to the right object with one Process Variable and one Control Variable Built In PICE PY 7 OF MIL cl 0 00 GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV4 Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced normal Control Valve for horizontal pipe object with one Process Variable one Setpoint and one Control Variable Buitt In PIDE ar 1 29 ml tC S 60 00 ml cy 0 00 i Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 233 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Table 71 PIDE Display Elements Descriptions Display Element Name Display Element Description GO_BuiltIn_PIDE CV5 sae Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced inverted Control Valve for horizontal pipe object with one Process PY 0 36 KL o Variable one Setpoint and one Control Variable SP 60 00 KL cy D00 i GO_BuiltIn _PIDE_CV6 Ta Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced Control Valve for vertical pipe to the left object with one Process i 0 51 Kegs D Variable one Setpoint and one Control Variable SE 60 00 Kegs cy D00 i GO_BuiltIn _PIDE_CV7 EE Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced Control a Valve for vertical pipe to the right object with one Process PY 1 03L Variable one Setpoint and one Control Variable SP amp O 00L cl 0 00 234 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Operator Tab T
50. gfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GFX File 85 KB _ RA BAS P_AlInDual Faceplate gf 1 21 2014 10 00 AM GFX File 435 KB RA BAS P_AlInDual Help gfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GFX File 86 KB _ RA amp BAS P_AInDual Quick gfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GFX File 83 KB __ RA BAS P_Aln Faceplate gfx 1 21 2014 10 00 4M GFX File 306 KB RA BAS P_Aln Help gfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GFX File 73 KB _ R amp BAS P_AlInMulti Faceplate gfx 1 21 2014 10 00 AM GFX File 605 KB RA BAS P_AlnMulti Help gf 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GFX File 78 KB _ RA BAS P_AInMulti Quick gfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GFX File 72 KB RA BAS P_Aln Quick gfx 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GFX File 69 KB fRA RAS P Alarm Farenlate aty 10292013 1 0 PRA GFX File 149 KR z v Graphic Displays gfx ggf v Com 6 Click only displays that you need do not import all of them The highlighted example with P_AIn shows that each Add On Instruction requires a Faceplate gfx Help gfx and Quick gfx Most motors valves and other devices need displays for Mode Configuration and Help and Alarm Configuration and Help See the Reference Manual for the respective Add On Instruction for a list of required gfx files 7 For FactoryTalk View SE applications also import the Common Analog Edit display 75 Chapter2 How to Install the Library Import the Macro These instructions are for FactoryIalk View SE projects only A macro must be imported to support faceplate to faceplate navigation by tag name
51. integer timestamp for example from an ALMD or ALMA instruction or the WALLCLOCKTIME object to a DateTime Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Microsecond as DINTs in Coordinated Universal Time UTC offset 0 The input LTIME is the 64 bit LINT number of microseconds since DT 1970 01 01__00 00 00 000000 UTC This instruction converts a DateTime Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Microsecond as DINTs in Coordinated Universal Time UTC offset 0 to an LTIME 64 bit integer timestamp for example from an ALMD or ALMA instruction or the WALLCLOCKTIME object The output LTIME is the 64 bit LINT number of microseconds since DI 1970 01 01_00 00 00 0000 UTC Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 L_XOR_1_0 00_AOI L5X T_Ltol_1_0 00_AOI L5X T_TtoL_1_0 00_AOI L5xX Time and Date Instructions Table 40 Time and Date Instructions Short Description Long Description File Name Name T_ADD T_ Clock T_DIFF T_DoW DateTime DateTime Time Date Time Clock Time DateTime DateTime Day of the Week Additional Add On Instructions Appendix D The Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects also includes instructions for performing date and time functions The time and date instructions are calculation functions only and no HMI components are provided T_Add Add Date Time plus time to get new Date Time T_ADD_1_0 01_AOI L5X This instruction adds a given amount
52. level Low Medium or High expected on the PV1 or PV2 to compensate for it during tuning Type a value for the PV1 or PV2 tuning limit scaled in the PV1 or PV2 units Configuration and Tuning Maintenance Code D Type a value for the maximum time for PV1 or PV2 autotune to complete following the CV step change When PV1 or PV2 autotune exceed this time tuning is aborted Type a value for the tuning parameter that determines the speed of the CV action for VIPV1 CV2PV1 CV3PV1 CV1PV2 Type a value for the internal model gain for V1PV1 CV2PV1 CV3PV1 CV1PV2 CV2PV2 or CV3PV2 Type a value for the internal model time constant for CV1PV1 CV2PV1 CV3PV1 CV1PV2 CV2PV2 or CV3PV2 Type a value for the internal model deadtime for V1PV1 CV2PV1 CV3PV1 CV1PV2 CV2PV2 or CV3PV2 CV2PV2 or CV3PV2 Click to copy selected values into the current IMC tags Click to start the autotune request Click to abort the autotune request Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F MMC Autotune Alarms Tab The MMC Autotune Alarms tab shows all the available alarms for the device and their current status Autotune C 1 for CC E an ok MMC Autotune Faceplate Help The MMC Autotune Faceplate Help page shows the command buttons that are used by MMC Autotune The faceplate also provides basic instruction on how to use Autotune
53. n a Ef MainRoutine Prev Sheet Shift Page Up pi Motor Add Sheet b Task_H_10s Delete Sheet i i oS Task_H_MainPrograrr a aes j nline Bee Program Tags fb Be EE MainRoutine d Task_Status 6 533 Task_Status_MainPro Close Routine Options Properties Alt Enter The Add FBD Element window appears 6 Browse to the Add On Instruction folder select the Add On Instruction and click OK mu Add FBD Element S FBD Element P_Motor Instruction Help gt gt Name Description _ P Gate Condition Gate Delay a F P_HiLoSelHigh or Low Select F P_Intk Interlocks i P_Logic Boolean Logic t P_Mode Mode UO ee _ P_Motor Two Speed Motor a 4_ P_Motor Hand Operated Motor Lt P_Motor Reversing Motor it P_nPos n Position Device 7 T Show Language Elements By Groups New Add On Instruction A function block or the language type you selected appears 7 Double click the name and type a new name for example Pump_1 8 Right click the new name and choose New name Pump_1 is our example Ctrl X Singe Spee Cut Element inp _RunFcbk Copy Element Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Element Del Delete Element but not Tag Add Element Alt Ins inp _NBIntkOK Save Instruction Defaults Clear Instruction Defaults Edit Main Operand Description Go To Instruction Help Never Show Description
54. new features for operator shelving of alarms improves alignment with ANSI ISA 18 2 2009 alarm management standards and gives operators new tools for dealing with alarm conditions to improve their response to abnormal process conditions Factorylalk Alarm and Event software within View 8 0 supports additional features such as dynamic alarm security and is recommended for new applications The Library uses instances of a dedicated Add On Instruction P_Alarm for alarm handling For example the P_Motor instruction uses four P_Alarm instances for the following four alarms e Fail to Start used in the examples of this section e Fail to Stop e Interlock Trip e I O Fault The methods described in this section can be used to configure any alarm for objects in the Library of Process Objects Recommended procedures for connecting the Add On Instruction instance alarms are presented in the following sub sections e Alarm with FactoryTalk Alarm and Event Server on page 92 e Alarm with FactoryTalk View ME Software on page 98 If you are using FactoryTalk View SE software Version 3 1 of the Library of Process Objects uses a P_Alarm instance to communicate alarm conditions to the tag based server Digital alarm tags for P_Alarm instances can be configured manually from within FactoryTalk View Studio We also provide the PlantPAx Alarm Builder tool see Appendix B that helps to streamline the digital alarm tag definition process and facilit
55. of Time to a Date Time to arrive at a new Date Time The new Date Time is normalized that is given as a valid if possible Gregorian Date and Time 0 lt Microseconds lt 1 000 000 0 lt Seconds lt 60 This instruction cannot add leap seconds 0 lt Minutes lt 60 0 lt Hours lt 24 1 lt Day lt 31 and Date is a valid Gregorian date e 1 lt Month lt 12 This object manages the controller Wall Clock providing date and time services T_Clock_1_0 01_AOI L5X including Accepts downloaded date and time for HMI or other sync source and sets the clock Reads the clock and provides the local date and time to other logic IMPORTANT Current date time is provided as individual DINTs and as a Date Time type for use with Date Time math instructions T_ADD T_SUB T_GRT and so forth Calculates and provides the day of the week for the current date IMPORTANT Use T_DoW to calculate the day of the week for any given date Optionally sets a flag once a day to request a clock sync update Based on configured shift start times determines the current production shift for up to three shifts The controller clock can be synchronized by writing a valid year month day hour minute and second into the appropriate settings When the clock has been set the settings are returned to 1 and the time is reflected in the corresponding values and status _ DIFF Date Time minus Date Time gives time difference T_DIFF_1_0 00_A
56. output rung state or EnableOut to feed downstream logic The output bit Out reflects the state of the given bit only for ladder animation and not the rung state If the given bit number is outside the range 0 63 the controller major faults on an invalid array index bad bit number There is no validity checking of the given bit number This instruction converts an LTIME 64 bit integer timestamp for example from an ALMD or ALMA instruction or the WALLCLOCKTIME object to a DateTime Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Microsecond as DINTs in Coordinated Universal Time UTC offset 0 The input LTIME is the 64 bit LINT number of microseconds since DT 1970 01 01_00 00 00 000000 UTC Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 L_OTE_1_0 00_AOI L5xX L_OTL_1_0 00_AOI L5xX L_OTU_1_0 00_AOI L5X L_SEL_1_0 00_AOI L5X L_SUB_1_0 00_AOI L5X L_XIC_1_0 00_AOI L5X L_Xl0_1_0 00_AOI L5xX 167 Appendix D Additional Add On Instructions Table 39 Long Integer Instructions Short Description Long Description File Name This instruction returns the bitwise Logical XOR exclusive OR output bit true if either but NOT both of the corresponding input bits are true of two input 64 bit integers Name L_XOR T_Ltol T_Ttol 168 Bitwise XOR 64 bit LTIME to DateTime DateTime to LTIME LINTs into an output 64 bit integer This instruction converts an LTIME 64 bit
57. request Operator mode Manual Device Operation Click to request Program mode pn Click to request Manual Loop mode Normal Operation of Devices Code A N a Click to initialize Current Segment and Soak Time Left Operator Segment Type a value for the Operator Segment Value This value is used if Ramp Soak is in the Manual mode Click to request Auto Loop mode Operator Soak Time Type a value for the Operator Soak Time Left Left Value This value is used if Ramp Soak is in the Manual mode Operator Output Type a value for the Operator output value Value This value is used as the Output when Ramp Soak is in the Manual mode 250 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab has inputs for Ramp Time Soak Time and Soak Value for each segment Ramp Soak a Maintenance Ramp Time Soak Time Soak Value lo 0 50 0 50 5 00 L 1 00 1 00 10 00 2 2 00 2 00 20 00 a 3 00 3 00 30 00 a 400 400 40 00 Segments 2 s 5 00 5 00 40 00 le 6 00 6 00 60 00 r OO r OO O 00 6 00 6 00 a0 00 o g 00 9 00 g0 00 The following table shows the functions of the RMPS Maintenance tab Table 82 RMPS Maintenance Tab Description Click to select the current segment Normal Operation CurrentSeg a of Devices Code A Ramp Time Configurationand RampValue units minute for the de
58. software because the tool uses RSLinx Classic OPC DA for its online communication and RSLinx Classic OPC Server is a 32 bit application The tool works fine on 64 bit Microsoft Windows operating systems it requires a 32 bit installation of Microsoft Excel Microsoft Office This tool lets you make bulk changes more easily especially for local configuration tags like strings instead of modifying each tag separately for each Add On Instruction instance However the controller must not be in a production environment controlling machinery or processes The spreadsheet works with the controller in Program mode so we strongly suggest it be used that way to avoid unintended control changes to running equipment WARNING The spreadsheet is used to modify parameters by using a controller The spreadsheet uses RSLinx Classic software DDE OPC so you need to have a suitably licensed copy OEM Gateway of the software You cannot use the Lite version of RSLinx Classic software We suggest that you make a back up copy of your application before following the steps below When using the spreadsheet all of your Add On Instruction instances backing tags are to be created in your RSLogix 5000 software project acd file and the project downloaded to your controller Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 121 AppendixA Online Configuration Tool Configure Parameters ags can nae a through the S pe or in RSLogi
59. tag to point to the name of the associated object Add On Instruction in the controller 103 Y Path used for display navigation features to other objects Include program scope if tag is a program scope tag 120 Additional parameter to pass to the display command to open the faceplate Typically used to define position for the faceplate 121 Additional parameter to pass to the display command to open the faceplate if defining X and Y coordinate separate parameters so that X is defined by 120 and Y is defined by 121 This lets the same parameters be used in subsequent display commands originating from the faceplate 122 These are the options for the global object display 4 To enter the backing tag for the 102 parameter you can type a tag into the Value column or click the Browse button or For the following procedures click Browse to enter the first parameter object tag The Tag Browser dialog box appears Tag Browser Select Tag Folders Contents of CLs Slote Online Gq PlantPAxLibrary3 a cL _Sloti AE Horn Readwrite cLx_slot2 amp AE Horn Readwrite 2 ai Diagnostic Items amp GE Horn Readwrite B Online g AE_Horn_ Readwrite H E ChangeDet H E ChangeDet_CLMsgCtrl FH ChangeDet_CLMsgDest H E ChangeDet_CLMsgSrc l H E ChangeDet_CSMsqCctrl 4 PP aE Pee he H E ChangeDet_CSMsgDest 4 CPET Paue H E ChangeDet_CSMsgSrc amp SN_MSG_ ReadlWrite H E ChangeDet_DTMsgCtr 5 5_BLINK ReadlWrite H
60. the ramp soak profile Single action performs the ramp soak profile once and then stops Place the ramp Click to set ramp Soak in Manual or ManHoldAftlnit soak in operator Program Hold mode after initialization Manual or Program Clear this checkbox to have Ramp Soak Hold mode after remain in it s previous mode after initialization initialization completes Reset program Click to set program control values ProgValueReset control values after processing Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Table 83 RMPS Engineering Tab Description RampValue Click to set if the RampValue parameter Engineering TimeRate parameters are are entered in minutes Configuration entered asatimein Clear this checkbox if the RampValue Code E minutes toreach parameter is entered in units minute the soak temperature Suspend ramping if Click to set Guaranteed Ramp GuarRamp the PV differs from If set and the instruction is in Auto the Output by more ramping is temporarily suspended if the than PV differs from the Output by more than RampDeadband RampDeadband Ramp Deadband Type a value Guaranteed Ramp RampDeadband Deadband in engineering units that PV is allowed to differ from the output when GuarRamp is on Clearthe soaktimer Click to clear the soak timer GuarSoak if the PV differs from the Output by more than SoakDeadband Soak D
61. time received as Values Updates the controller clock to time received if allowed by configuration Calculates clock drift difference between previous and new controller time and displays as Values Cfg_PollT The Poll Time def 1440 min 1 day is the number of minutes between polls of the NTP server for reliable time after a successful get of the time Cfg_RetryT The Retry Time def 60 min 1 hour is the number of minutes between polls of the NTP server for reliable time after a failure to get the time Cfg_ENSlotNumber Enter the chassis slot number of the EtherNet IP module for example 1756 EN2T that can communicate with the time server This module must support socket services For more information see the EtherNet IP Socket Interface Application Technique publication ENET AT002 Cfg_ POctetX Enter the four octets of the time server s IP Address for example 192 168 1 1 in decimal Cfg_AllowClockUpdate 1 Allow AOI to update controller clock 0 Just get the time UTC and display it Cfg_AllowMCmdSync 1 Permit manual sync request via MCmd_Sync 0 No manual sync request allowed Cfg_AllowPeriodicSync 1 Permit enabling periodic clock sync via MCmd_Enable 0 Periodic sync is kept disabled Cfg_SyncOnPwrup 1 Request time sync on controller first scan 0 Do not initiate sync on controller first scan Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 177 AppendixD Addition
62. used to operate open and close a single solenoid operated valve in a variety of modes monitoring for fault conditions Use this instruction to operate a single solenoid spring return valve either energize to open fail closed or energize to close fail open The valve can have but does not require limit switch feedback for either or both ends of travel Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM015 Inp_OpenLS Inp_ClosedLS Inp_LowerLS m Inp_UpperLS Inp_PermOK E Inp_NBPermOK Inp_IntIkkOK Inp_NBintlkOK Inp_Reset Out_Open f Out_Close 9 Out_LiftLower 9 Out_LiftUpper P Sts_Closed 9 Sts_Opened Sts_LiftLower 9 Sts_LiftUpper Sts_Moving Sts_Pulsing Sts_Hand A Sts_Maint Sts_Ovrd Sts_Prog Sts_Oper Global Object Add On Instruction P_ValveSO 2 Solenoid Operated Valve Inp_OpenLs Inp_ClosedLS e Inp_PermOK Inp_NBPermOK Inp_IntlkOK E Inp_NBintlkOkK Inp_Hand c Inp_OvrdCmd a Inp_Reset Out Sts_Closed Sts_Opening Sts_Opened Sts_Clasing Sts_Err Sts_Hand Sts_Maint Sts_Ovrd Sts_Prog Sts_Oper Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 De i Bs Ge TestValyeMP Faceplate Ingr 1 Addition Line Block alve A ella ator a E 35 Chapter 1 36 Overview Table 7 Valves 2 state Valve Statistics P_ValveStats The P_ValveStats instruction monit
63. variables and bar graph for each e Current setpoint e High H and Low L clamping limits for the CVs e Input status Communications OK Communications Fail Bad PV Quality or Uncertain PV Quality Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 187 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Operator Mode Command Button Requested Modes PARET EE CA REEE EEEE Indicator gt De oo 0 L foo ie 0 00 P H 100 00 EEN y A ee Ea Auto Loop Mode Operator oo 0 i oo 100 Command Button 0 00 P H 100 00 Ea TE N y j ManualLoopMode fA A prepreg pene Command Button ooo 1 oo aai 188 ja Program Mode Command Button CV Sliders SP Slider Current PV Teh a E Ad bs Ad as Home Operator ss E y 0 0 00 P Current CV3 Current SP PV Indicator The following table lists the functions on of the CC Operator tab Table 45 CC Operator Tab Description Click to request Operator mode Manual Device Operation Code B Click to request Program mode Click to request Manual Loop mode Normal Operation of Devices Code A Click to request Auto Loop mode Operator CV value Typea value fora CV output CV1 CV2 and CV3 CV Slider CV1 CV2 Move this slider to adjust the loop CV output Equipment Maintenance and CV3 Code C SP Slider Move this slider to adjust the loop setpoint Operator Setpoint Type a value fo
64. 0 LoLo Com AE FF RICGN2 CGN2_MTRBIO4 FalToSian fr RICGNZICGN2_MTREOOA FallloStop c fr AOGNZICGN MTRGO0A OF quit Coen he HICGM2 CGN2_MTRGDOA intikTrip com FF i 747 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 a PlartPaxDer Display Appa MD jpdicditionitciT PiartPAxDem Display TRA BAS P_Motorkew Fiac PianiPAxDem Ditplay RA BAS P_hotor Faceple PianiPaxDem Display RA BAS P_hotor Facepte PiartPaxDem Display TRA BAS P_Motor Facepl PianiPAxDem Display TRA BAS P_Motor Facepl COGN Cice vw display PlaniPax OGM Area GHH DGH Cic v display PlaniPias CGM Area CGH i CGM Cire w display PanP x CON Area COGNE DoM Cire w ditplay PanPAx CGN Area CON i CON Cic w depay FPianPAr CGN Area OHH i GH Cic v depay PianlP x CGM Area CGH i CGM Circ w Giplay PlanPaAx CON Area CNM E DEM Cie w damay PianPAx CGN Area CoN i OOH Cic v dspay PanP Ak OGM Arom GOH CGN Cinc_w display PaniP x CON Area COM DGM Circ w Ginplay PanPAx CGN Area CGN E OGN_Cinc_w display PanPAx DON Area OGNI CGH Cic v display PlaniP Ax CGM Area COM i F Deisuk max shaha time E Minutes 9 Click the X in the upper right corner to close the window 147 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool Build ME Alarms 148 The diagram outlines the procedures for creating FactoryTalk View ME software alarms The procedures in this section are in the same order as the headings in the diagram Figure 8 Alarm Builder ME Workflow
65. 00 Output Current 0 00 Amps Time before Overload Trip 0 00 Time before Trip Reset 0 00 Overview Chapter 1 Table 6 Motors Process Object Description Object Elements SMC Flex Smart Motor Controller Global Object Faceplate P_SMCFlex P_SMCFlex SMC Flex Smart Motor Controller QA ele Operator a ls l with the motor controller to Stopped gt E start and stop the motor The instruction also monitors the PSMOFIex z O Q SMC Flex Smart Motor Controller ee dA status of the motor detects Stopped The P_SMCFlex instruction controls a motor by using a SMCFlex series Smart Motor Controller soft starter The instruction communicates motor failure to start or stop Ref FaultCodeList Motor Ready and displays motor runtime inp NBPermOK information The runtime data nP NBntkOK seem gt PAOA 00 includes phase currents motor ins ons Seana B power and power factor motor d meres sie Ariane E thermal usage MTU and sts Hand f motor controller fault codes 8 5 This instruction is provided as a St Ope l rung import for installation Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM053 Variable speed Drive P_VSD Global Object Faceplate Stopped Reactor 1 Agitator Speed Control The P_VSD instruction operates one variable speed motor by using a drive AC variable er frequency or DC a Fy This instruction is designed to Add On
66. 014 3 57 PM bb Libraries ProcessQbjects_3 1 00 20140624 V20Emu ACcD ut Public Documents Type Ralogix 3000 Project m Rockwell Automation Ji Activations RSLogix 5000 m Logs m Roview Enterprise dJ Public Downloads J Public Music Ji Public Pictures nT j File nare ProcessObjects_3 1 00 20140624 V20EruAcD ACD files acd a ProcessObjects_3 Date modified 10 20 2014 3 05 Ph a ProcessQbjects_3 1 00 20140624 V20Erm 10 20 2014 3 00 PM WA ProcessObjects_3_1 00 20140624 V20Em 9 1020 2014 3 04 PM WA SequencerSamples 4CD 6112014 1 57 PM a Cancel 3 Navigate to the folder that stores the controller s project file 4 Select the ACD file and click Open Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 129 Appendix B 130 Alarms Builder Tool A message window displays if the tool cannot determine the RSLogix 5000 software version of the selected ACD file 5 Type the RSLogix 5000 software version and click OK if prompted Otherwise proceed to step 6 6 On the Edit Logix Description Format dialog box click OK to use the defaults if the following conditions apply e You do not use a format for describing controller tags e You use Add On Instructions with local strings that describe the tag label and engineering units Edit Logix Description Format This window is used for defining the Logix tag Description format The tag descrip
67. 1 resources 13 local tag configuration 122 Logix tag alarm tag generation 142 M ME alarm build 148 custom alarm build 151 data types 153 quick build 149 MMC autotune 229 faceplates 218 mode configuration 86 modular multivariable control built in instructions 218 0 online configuration tool 121 organize AE tags into folders 138 controllers with alarms 135 overview alarms builder tool 127 library 11 P palette color modification 163 color utility 159 PIDE built in instructions 232 positioning xand y coordinate 107 prepare XML import file 136 prescan considerations 85 programming considerations 83 proportional integral derivative enhanced built in instructions 232 purpose statement 9 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Q quick AE alarm build 136 display 109 ME build 149 ramp soak built in instructions 248 resources additional 9 library 13 RMPS faceplates 248 Rockwell Automation library 13 runtime security configuration 105 S SE alarm build 128 custom build 138 quick build 136 security adding users 105 code description 182 configuration 105 HMI configuration 181 select controller 129 software tag configuration 77 spreadsheet upload tags 122 statement purpose 9 synchronize AE cofiguration tags 141 T tag associate displays 140 faceplate configuration 122 FactoryTalk ME software 77 synchronization 141 templates
68. 1 deg F Add On Instruction ProgProgReq ProgOperReq RMPS Ramp Soak PY Out CurrentSegProg CurrentSeg OutProg SoakTimeLeft SoakTimeProg ProgAutoReq Auto f ProghanualReq Manual f ProgHoldReq Hold E RampValue SoakValue SoakTime GuarRampOnE GuarSoakOn EF ProgOper E Faceplate Built In PIDE yx aa o E Home Operator Operator a 0 100 00 60 00 0 0 00 P Ratio 1 00 Ci 1 00 0 1 00 P 0 00 gt fm yY M a uau mig upg oo 1 ea 100 0 00 P H 100 00 Faceplate Ramp Soak Soaking Soak Time Left EZA o 17922 73 10 P 0 00 P Current Segment Output REE 4 0 PY 0 00 0 00 P deg F Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Table 13 APC Instructions Process Object Description Object Elements Totalizer TOT Global Object Faceplate This instruction typically totals the amount of a material added unning To over time based on a flow Flowing x signal j E4 Support for the TOT instruction S g includes the following 11 11 Onoins A D Fy e Time base selectable as seconds minutes hours or 79 days i a P a a Add On Instruction Remaining to Deliver 202 78 Onions i eile ues Quantity Delivered 797 22 Onions i TOT re typically used to switch to a oes an ak ial mainline slower feed rate Digital din t
69. 156 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Color Change Utility Additional Add On Instructions HMI Security Codes Configuration Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Table of Contents Appendix C Tasca Foch Pileiccctsaccuaducetvinihe aaa aa k aa 159 Use the Utility with Library Objects 0 eee e eee eee ee 160 Modityine the Color Palettersciicrsirirgierin irinse Cria aE 163 Use the Utility with other Factory Talk View Software Files 164 Appendix D Long Integer and Time Instructions 0 0 cece eee eee eee 165 Time and Date Instructions 00 cece ccc cceeeescceeeeeees 169 Appendix E Factory Talk View Software Code Description 045 181 Appendix F BUT 1h PEO LUNG eerrinreserun k cause Ges ease A RS 183 Operator Tab acitsacetsnet avn diet AE nu hiedbuteees 183 PPG A o A EEA LOEO ices Shee EENE NE 185 Faceplate Tel pce soue e rara E E EERE REE 185 Coordinated Control GO asic ictiadens O EER 186 VistalizatiOn Piles reriosiuen res r aa r a A a ra 186 Display Elements usrts neer eraren nan R ENEE 187 Operator T a Dero aA ETE EE 187 Maintenance TaDisuvosizresserosori ras aT e E a aa 189 Engineering Labi ssiciuccataentmahviinieacalaes EA 193 Trends LAr ac oe wie thn os oh Catad tne cae E SeeGtuasins oes 195 Plats Wa soi oc ett re heeeent derek dle oe E 196 Bacep late tAclp wn ancccpaanaemiawe ten neem e ea eee 197 Coordinated Control CC Au
70. 19 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Operator Mode Program Mode Command Button Command Button CV Sliders PV1 Slider PV1 Indicator Requested Modes Indicator Current Loop Mode Indicator Auto Loop Mode Command Button Manual Loop Mode Command Button A Input Status Indicator B Current CV3 Value os fo Current SP2 Value Operator CV3 Value _______py D 0 00 P Program CV3 Value Operator SP2 Value _ gt 32 00 0 Ee P Program SP2 Value The following table lists the functions on of the MMC Operator tab Table 64 MMC Operator Tab Description Click to request Operator mode Manual Device Operation Code B Click to request Program mode Normal Operation of Devices Code A Click to request Auto Loop mode 220 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Table 64 MMC Operator Tab Description Click to request Manual Loop mode Normal Operation of Devices Operator CV Value Type a value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 CV1 CV2 and CV3 CV Slider CV1 CV2 Move this slider to adjust the loop CV output Equipment Maintenance and CV3 Code C Operator Setpoint Type a value for the loop Setpoint Normal Operation of Devices Value SP1 and SP2 Code A PV Slider PV1 Move this slider to adjust the loop PV value Equipment Maintenance and PV2 Code C Maintenance Tab
71. 2 OnlineP1_ Motor H Pi_current Access Rights _ Description HE Pi_FlowSwitch 2 ack Fail Readwrite H 0 Pt_HighTermp amp ack Fail Readwrite H Elehighvibr amp AckIntik Readwrite wy aE Fal ae Ack_1OFauk Readwrite bei PIIMotor_01 amp Alm_Faill Readwrite fei P1_Motor_FwdPerm alm_FailT Readwrite P1 Motor _Intik ei a Si cae amp alm_Inth Readwrite rei amp alm_loFaut Readwrite H E Pi_Motor_Perm H B P1_Motor_ResInh CFg_Allow Readwrite EEH P1 Motor RunTime cig Failt Readwrite cia Pi Powered amp cfo_Faill Readwrite H Pi Reset amp cfg Fail Readwrite A E P1_Reset_FED amp Cfg_FailT Readwrite H B P2_ Motor F amp cfg Fail Readwrite el I o om ES Refresh All Folders Tag filter None gt Selected Tag CLX_Slot2 P1_M otor Home area Cancel Help i 116 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Use the Library Chapter 4 8 Click OK 9 To configure the 103 parameter copy the path part of 102 into the Value column No curly braces Notag Just area and shortcut 10 Click the Value column for the fifth parameter and enter a value 0 1 2 per the desired display This is an example of parameter values Global Object Parameter Yalues CL8 Slot JP 1_ Motor cx sote ooo d A as 11 Click OK 12 Click Save Rockwell Aut
72. 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support overview page or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation about us sustainability ethics product environmental compliance page Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A
73. 2C EN P November 2014 PowerFlex 755 Drive P_PF755 PowerFlex 755 i Motor operated Valve P_ValveMO alye Control Overview Variable speed Drive P_VSD Agitator Speed Mix proof Valve P_Valve MP alve Control N N mi Na ZS X wN E Pet Chapter 1 61 Chapter1 Overview Analog Output P_AOut Analog Output jaa a af Cy 35 50 0 100 Flowmeter Dosing P_DoseFM Flowmeter Dosing aae 0 00 Gallons 0 02 GPM Flow Stopped no B D 62 Discrete Output P_DOut Discrete Device Weigh Scale Dosing P_DoseWS wel Scale Dosing A M SE E 0 00 Pounds 99999999 Pounds Flow Stopped 150 00 150 om x 7 kl Discrete 2 3 4 state Device P_D4SD Discrete Device Neal al al af North North South East West gt D n Position Device P_nPos n Position Device da a J f Everywhere 010 gt gt gt gt gt Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced P_PIDE Reboiler Steam Flow A el Coordinated Control CC C C pE sr TT pv lt o 0 00 deg By Ho Aa oe MF H o a Overview Chapter 1 Sequencer Object P_Seq Seq Prompt Branching 6 2 e
74. 3 Maximum EU 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 Minimum EU 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Override Value 0 00 0 00 0 00 Timing execution mode Periodic Oversampling Real Time RTS Period ms Oversarmple At seconds 0 000 Elapsed time in seconds used to 0 25 calculate the process output 194 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F The following table shows the functions of page 2 of the CC Engineering tab Table 51 CC Engineering Tab Page 2 Description Maximum Type the maximum or minimum scaled Engineering e PVEUMax Minimum EU value for PV Configuration e CV2EUMax PV Type the maximum and minimum value Code E e CV2EUMax V1 of CV1EU CV2EU or CV3EU This is the e CV2EUMax v2 value of CV1EU CV2EU or CV3EU that e PVEUMin corresponds to 100 or 0 of CV1 CV2 CV2EUMin V3 or CV3 l e CV2EUMin e CV2EUMin Override Value Type the CV1 CV2 or CV3 Override value e CV10verrideValue V1 CV1 CV2 or CV3 is set to this value when V20verrideValue V2 in Override mode CV30verrideValue V3 Timing execution Click to select the time base execution TimingMode mode mode Trends Tab The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time These faceplate trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement but not replace dedicated historical or live trend displays The Trends tab is divide
75. 5000 Instructions Engineering Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the MMC Engineering tab has various Operator inputs options for the PV CV and Timing Execution mode The following values are displayed e RTS period e Operator inputs for Maximum and Minimum EU for PV1 PV2 CV1 CV2 and CV3 e Operator options for Timing Execution mode A nela a PV1 PV 2 Cv1 Cv2 CV3 Maximum EU 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 Minimum EU 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Timing execution mode Periodic Oversampling Real Time RTS Period ms 1 The following table shows the functions of page 2 of the MMC Engineering tab Table 68 MMC Engineering Tab Page 2 Description Maximum Type the maximum minimum PV and CV Engineering e PVEUMax Minimum EU values in engineering units Configuration e CVEUMax PV1 Code E e PVEUMin PV2 e CVEUMin CVI CV2 V3 CV Value in Override Type the CV value when in Override mode Mode CVOverrideValue Timing execution Click to select Periodic Oversampling or TimingMode mode Real Time for the execution mode Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Trends Tab The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time These faceplate trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement but not replace dedicated historical or live trend displays The Trends tab is divided into two page
76. Alarm Ingoart Export Wizard File to Inport a ia baud I Eji 5 Click Next Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 145 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool The Alarm Import Export Wizard Alarms to Import dialog box appears with several choices 5 kl I s jj ls Alann Impart Export Wizard Alarma to Impan 6 Click Import only new alarm definitions from the import file and skip existing alarm definitions and click Finish The Alarm Builder loads the file It can take several minutes for the import to complete A message box appears telling you the import was successful Alarms Import Export Wizard 7 Click OK 8 In the Explorer tree configuration double click Alarm and Event Setup 146 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B The Alarm and Event Setup tag database window appears to let you view the alarm definitions JE CPGH1 Programc SHARED HEADER FF KCPG Progra RO1_AGITATE_VFD FF E CPG Program PMH _AGHTATE_FXD fF ECP Progra PMi AGITATE FXO fF E CPGI Progra PAD _AGITATE_FXD fr KCPG Program PM _AGTATE_FXD fF KICEN AT600 H Com_AE 0 F EJCON ICGN2_AT6O0 HHI Com AED F FICGNACGN2_ATEO0Lo Com_AEO fr 2 OGN2 CGN2_ATBOO LoLo Com_AE fF ECOMARE ONA LSLEGD Tatbisagnes c FF KICONACGN2 LT DO H Com AEn FICGN2CGN2_LTE00 HH Com_AE O fF FICONZICON2 LTE00 Lo Com_AE0 fF FICONZICON2 LT6
77. C EN P November 2014 209 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Table 59 IMC Engineering Tab Page 1 Description Use ratio control Check to enable ratio control when in Engineering UseRatio when in Cascade CascadeRatio mode Configuration Ratio mode IMPORTANT Checking this option Code E displays the current ratio multiplier Operator ratio multiplier and Program ratio multiplier on the Operator tab See Operator Tab on page 187 Checking this option also displays the Cascade Ratio portion of the SAMA diagram on page lof the Maintenance tab See Maintenance Tab Page 1 on page 189 Limit CV in manual Check to limit the CV while in Manual CVManLimiting Mode mode Place instruction in Check to set the Loop mode to manual ManualAfterInit Manual mode while when CV initialization is requested CVinitializing isset Clear the checkbox to leave the Loop mode unchanged when initialization is requested When the initialization request clears the loop resumes control in its previous Loop mode Reset Program Check to reset Program inputs after each Inputs after each execution ProgValueReset execution Model Gain units Select either EU or for the Model Gain GainEUSpan units Windup High CV Check so that CV cannot increase in value WindupHin not allowed to increase Windup Low CV Check so that CV cannot decrease in value WindupLIn not allowed to decreas
78. C EN P November 2014 21 Chapter1 Overview Notes 22 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Procedural Control Overview Chapter 1 The Process Objects in this group provide procedural control definition via a series of discrete sequential actions Table 5 Procedural Control Process Object Description Sequencer Object P_Seq The P_Seq instruction is a controller based step sequencing solution that reduces engineering time by automating common operator procedures The step by step configuration makes it easy to adjust procedures directly from the HMI displays Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM006 Flowmeter Dosing P_DoseFM The P_DoseFM instruction controls an ingredient addition that uses a flowmeter to measure the amount of ingredient added The flowmeter can be an analog flowmeter signal proportional to flow a pulse generating flowmeter pulse count proportional to quantity delivered or a digital flowmeter providing flow rate or quantity totalized flow information Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM020 Weigh Scale Dosing P_DoseWS The P_DoseWS instruction controls an ingredient addition that uses a weigh scale to measure the amount of ingredient added The weigh scale can be on the receiving vessel gain in weight or on the sourcing vessel loss in weight The weigh scale can be connected via
79. CONNOTATO noua nee chase ene EEEE 105 Add Users to Security CodeS eene na eE lee AE AURERE LEA 105 Global Object C ontigurationys cxiesata relat ee e 107 IX andy POGON airina a E E 107 DCD 1S OA a create Soci tise cid ra tele ieee tae E EO BA ee 109 Saving Your Data in FactoryTalk View SE Software 109 Maintain Library Releases ecu noted saneudeiwipauahene muegseagenteds 110 Customize the LIDA enea e es hee kane tees 111 Chapter 4 Createa Library INSTAN E nsnecedniona ri iaa T n 113 Device Conn eUratiOn rented E EE 119 Appendix A Before OU DEO sccancmcencrdensane nc snigetetereraamqaesee banat 121 Configure Parameter By Using a Spreadsheet 0006 122 Appendix B Pelor YOU DEOMI ic csan carats tas ET EEES mime elves smeds 127 Bald AF Alamo ode wlan ae eb baa caeub Lee carbo seat 128 l Selece Controller vince beaedick eine Bek i eee awe aes 129 Asociate legs herd ocean ot eae os at Beane ws 133 3 Define HMI Alarm Server 0 cece cece cece eeees 135 4 Prepare XML Import EIE sirip devnuse denen ad ie EE 136 Soave WML limport Milesa nacuieneekee ana teseou see aehsatas 144 Bula ME Alai Meiran r detained aeanme tasted 148 l Select Controller ein ccsctety 062 hoon neko tows ee abies Bameade 149 2 Associate EUV ac tino oo guna e EELEE ra 149 3 Define HMI Alarm Server 0 0 cece cece ee eeeeees 149 4 Prepare XML Import File ivc5 tyene ean Aene EAN nRa 149 Se dave Mic Import Piles ict nics aE AE
80. CV3 HLimit and CV1 CV2 and CV3 LLimit values Engineering Configuration Code E Check to set the Loop mode to manual when CV initialization is requested Clear the checkbox to leave the Loop mode unchanged when initialization is requested When the initialization request clears the loop resumes control in its previous Loop mode Check to reset Program control values after each execution Select either EU or for the Model Gain units in EU or of span Click to select the CV to be driven to its target Type the value that determines the speed with which the control variables approach their target values Engineering Configuration Click to select the first CV to act to Code E compensate for PV1 SP1 deviation Click to select the second CV to act to compensate for PV1 SP1 deviation Click to select the third CV to act to compensate for PV1 SP1 deviation Click to select the first CV to act to compensate for PV2 SP2 deviation Click to select the second CV to act to compensate for PV2 SP2 deviation Click to select the third CV to act to compensate for PV2 SP2 deviation Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 CVManLimiting ManualAfterlnit ProgValueReset GainEUSpan JargetCV TargetRespTC e PV1Act1stCV e PV1Act2ndCV e PV1Act3rdCV e PV2Act1stCV e PV2Act2ndCV e PV2Act3rdCV 225 Appendix F 226 MM Faceplates for Built in Logix
81. CY Ste PW Tunin Autotune Size 6 5 0 Ti aa 45 00 Timeout min ove Autotuned l A Current C Gain 0 8600 md 0 8600 9 Time Constant 6 5000 6 5000 Dead Time 18 5000 18 5000 Autotuned Values lt Response 16 6667 Slow 6 3333 Time Const EEEa Medium 4 1667 Load Parameters Button The following table lists the functions on of the IMC Autotune Operator tab Table 61 IMC Autotune Operator Tab Description Process Type Click on either Integrating or Non inegrating Configuration and Tuning a Maintenance Code D Approximation Type a value for the non integrating model approximation Factor factor IMPORTANT You can enter this value only when Integrating is selected as the Process Type CV Step Size Type a value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 step size in percent for the tuning step test Noise Level Click on Low Medium or High to set the estimate of the noise level expected on the PV to compensate for it during tuning PV Tuning Limit Type a value for the PV tuning limit scaled in PV units When Autotune is running and predicted PV exceeds this limit the tuning is aborted Autotune Timeout Type a value for the maximum time for autotune to complete following the CV step change When autotune exceeds this time tuning is aborted Currrent Gain Type a value for the internal model gain for CV1 CV2 or CV3 Enter a positive or negative gain depending on process direction Current Time Type a val
82. Cells Editing v fe Copyright Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved v A B 38 PvawemP 1 99 RSLinxOPCSERVER EnterTopic_ PvavemP 7 4 250 39 PvawesO 1 63RSLimxOPCSERVER EnterTopic P_Vaeso 7 4 250 40 P_ValveStats 1 amp RSLwOPCSERVER EnterTopic PvaveStats 7 J 4 250 41 Pyso 17 12 RSLinmOPCSERVER Entertope P yso _ _ 7 7 250 42 ForPvsD 33 2 RSUMOPCSERVER EnterTopic Prax 7 4 250 43 ForPvsD 48 2 RSUWOPCSERVER EnterTopic PF525 7 J 4 250 44 ForPvsD 12 2 RSLimOPCSERVER EnterTopic Pram 7 4 250 45 MR is lt CR r 20 46 For P_PF753 P_PF755 211 2 RSLiwxOPCSERVER EnterTopic PF75x 7 4 250 47 ForPvsD_ 40 2 RSLinxOPCSERVER EnterTopic__ Proc 7 4 250 48 ForP_StrapTblinstance 2 3 RSLinxOPCSERVER EnterTopic__ P_stapTbicig 7 4 250 Copyright Rockwell Automation inc All Rights Reserved Yv 4 Name and save the file that you want to use for the controller 5 Open RSLinx Classic software 122 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Online Configuration Tool Appendix A 6 From the DDE OPC menu choose Topic Configuration The DDE OPC Topic Configuration dialog box appears DDE OPC Topic Configuration SBS 6 amp L amp amp amp i Project Default Topic E
83. Centered on left edge Centered on right edge CC Center of screen 121 Leave blank See the tip TIP The values of global object parameters 120 and 121 are passed directly to the Display command that opens the faceplate s display gfx Nothing prevents you from putting any valid Display command parameters in these values For more information see the FactoryTalk View Site Edition User s Guide publication VIEWSE UM006 or the online Help for the Display command parameters in the FactoryTalk View Studio software Table 37 Absolute X Y Positioning Global Object Parameter Description 120 SE Left edge of faceplate nnn pixels from the left edge of the screen 120 ME Numeric value for example 100 121 SE Top edge of the faceplate nnn pixels down from the top edge of the screen 121 ME Numeric value for example 100 Parameter 122 controls the display that appears when you click the display element You can expand the row height for parameter 122 by typing a value and clicking Enter e 0 specifies the full faceplate always appears e I specifies the full faceplate appears if the user has security code C see page 105 and the Quick display see page 109 appears if you do not have security code C e 2 specifies the Quick display always appears e If parameter 122 is left blank the full faceplate always appears See the Use Global Objects section in each A
84. EN P November 2014 A add users to security 105 additional resources 9 alarm AE build 138 AE custom build 138 builder tool 127 color and messages 154 configuration 87 FactoryTalk ME configuration 98 FactoryTalk SE configuration 92 Logix tag 142 ME build 148 server organization 135 tag folder organization 138 triggers 154 associate alarm tags to displays 140 autotune built in instructions 183 coordinated control 197 faceplates 183 IMC 214 MMC 229 benefit for using library 12 build AE alarms 128 AE XML file options 143 alarm tool 127 ME alarms 148 quick AE alarms 136 built in instructions autotuner 183 cooridnated control 186 faceplates 183 internal model control 201 modular multivariable control 218 PIDE 232 ramp soak 248 totalizer 255 C CC autotune 197 faceplates 186 codes HMI security 182 color alarms 154 change utility 159 palette 159 palette modification 163 common configurations 83 Index configuration alarms 87 common 83 device via faceplate 119 FactoryTalk ME alarms 98 global objects 107 HMI security 181 mode 86 online tool 121 security 105 considerations prescan 85 programming 83 text entry 109 controller associate HMI server 133 select 129 template imports 66 coordinated control autotune 197 built in instructions 186 coordinates xand y positioning 107 custom AE alarm build 138 display elements and faceplates 159 facepla
85. Find Within Final Name Import Content Import Name P_Motor References will be imported as configured in the References folders E Errors wamings Final Name a ieee Collision Details Description Single Speed Motor A Revision v3 1 03 Release Revision Note See Release Notes for Library version 3 Vendor Rockwell Automation Once the import is complete the Add On Instructions are visible in the Controller Organizer Til P_DIn Hg P_DoseFM Hg P_DoseWS Gg P_DOut Hg P_Fanout Hg P_Gate Hg P_HiLoSel LG P_Intlk Hg P_Logic LG P_Mode Brai P Motor Ga P_Motor25pd Ll P_MotorHO MotorRev A P_nPos A BP Berm P m 68 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 How to Install the Library Chapter 2 Add an Add On Instruction to a Routine Do these steps to add an Add On Instruction to a routine create a backing tag and connect I O Add On Instructions can be used in any of the Logix languages Ladder Diagram Function Block Diagram or Structured Text In this example we show how to add an instruction instance to a Function Block Diagram routine 1 Inthe Controller Organizer right click the Task and choose New Routine Controller Organizer Ix ab ab A i G 5 Task_A MainPrograrr fe P Ta 100m i oi Oh Task_B_Ma ImportXoutine Task_C_250ms i A Task_C_Ma Cut Ctrl X Prograr Copy Ctrl C z E
86. Ga Ef Logix Controllers 6 af ProcessObjects_3_1_00 El ray Associated HMI Application PlantPAxLibrarys B FactoryTalk View SE Local a B HMI Server Name PlantPAxLibrary3 u Data Server Name RSLinx Enterprise Ban tly Data Server Device Shortcut Name CL _Slot1 ie E HMI Alarm Servers iS 134 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool 3 Define HMI Alarm Server This section shows how to add an alarm server to organize the controllers that Appendix B you want to create AE alarm polling tags This alarm server has no association to the AE alarm server that you configure in FactoryIalk View Studio software Follow these steps 1 Inthe Alarms Builder configuration tree right click HMI Alarm Servers and choose Add Alarm Server The Add HMI Alarm Server dialog box appears ad PlantPAx Alarms Builder and Tag Data Edit Tool File View D a ied Tools Windows Help Logix Controllers B f ProcessObjects_3_1_00 2 Associated HMI Application PlantPAxLibrary3 FactoryTalk View SE Local HMI Server Name PlantPAxLibrary3 a Data Server Name RSLinx Enterprise s4 Data Server Device Shortcut Name CLX_Slotl J HMI Alarm Servers Add HMI Alarm Server Name AlarmServerCPG Description 2 Type a name and a description optional 3 Click OK The Select Controllers for Building Alarms Tags in HMI Alarm Server window appears Selec
87. High Deviation Low Deviation Low Low Deviation Deviation Deadband PV Positive ROC Limit PV Negative ROC Limit 240 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Type values for the PV high high high low and low low alarm limits scaled in PV units Type a value for the PV alarm limit deadband scaled in PV units Type values for the Deviation high high high low and low low alarm limits scaled in PV units Type a value for the Deviation alarm limit deadband scaled in PV units Enter values for the positive and negative rates of change alarm limits Disable Alarms Code H PVHHLimit PVHLimit PVLLimit PVLLLimit PVDeadband DevHHLimit DevHLimit DevLLimit DevLLLimit DevDeadband PVROCPosLimit PVROCNegLimit Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Table 76 PIDE Maintenance Tab Page 4 Description PV ROC Period Type a value for the PV Rate of change Disable Alarms PVROCPeriod sample period This is the time period in Code H seconds over which the rate of change for PV is evaluated Type zero to disable the PV rate of change period checking Engineering Tab The Engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges options for device and I O setup displayed text and faceplate to faceplate navigation settings for initial system commissioning or later system changes The Engineering tab is divide
88. Instruction work with all currently a available and many legacy eS M oppe gt lla Ref_FaultCodeList Allen Bradley drives a aah including ree u Sarp uy e Bulletin 1336 e me Aena Ou Ceafaut b Inp_Accelerating ut_Fwd e Bulletin 1395 iva ve spose b Feedback Hz foward amp Inp_Faulte al_Spee p e PowerFlex 4 40 70 ERN VAr arpan Reference Hz 30 00 30 00 np_FwdNBPermOK Val_Fault D 700 7000 El inp RewePermOK So secre Drive Ready e PowerFlex DC Drive al np NEINKOK Setia B OW X IV S E Inpurand Ras paging E amp Inp_Ovri ts_ActualDir This instruction is provided as a a micea SSA E Tee Eura Enee ooo rung import for installation ere Jog Speed Hz 16 00 16 00 Se Man p Sts_Ovrd f Sts_Prog 9 Sts_Oper 8 Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM016 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 29 Chapter1 Overview Table 6 Motors Process Object Description Object Elements E1 Plus Overload Relay P_E1 PlusE Global Object Faceplate The P_E1 Plus EtherNet IP P_E1PlusE Motor Overload Relay instruction controls and i 0 00 FLA W M i monitors an E1 Plus overload Y E4 Ur oes relay by using a 193 ETN CAPAC Add On Instruction Average Full Load Amps 0 0 4 The instruction monitors the i P_E1PlusE R overload relay for warming and E1 Plus Overload Relay EtherNet IP trip conditions displays motor ii current a
89. ME tag 4 Click Sync 5 Click OK to complete synchronization 152 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B B Select Data Type You can select individual tags for the data types found for the alarm server controllers that have alarm definitions The Edit ME Alarms dialog box consists of three sections for tag configuration e Upper data type and tag selection shown below e Middle trigger variables e Lower trigger messages _ oj x ES Edit ME Alarms Data Type PAn pute Tag Label Description Il_P4 MyP_HDOBC 2 Level MyP_HDBOC 2 Level Tank 1 Level Export All Clear All Toggle Selected Apple Changes My PAS P iy PASI Pump 1 Flory 1 Click the Data Type drop down to access the associated tags 2 In the Export column check each checkbox for the selected tags and use the buttons to export toggle and clear all IMPORTANT Make sure to click the Apply Changes button to save changes for the tags in the grid box 3 Click the Tag Label Description or Eng Unit text boxes to type new cell values The Alarms Builder tool parses the Description in the controller s ACD file to set the initial values for the tag label description and engineering unit Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 153 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool C Define Triggers The middle section of the Edit ME Al
90. Manual SYSLIB RM004 Object Elements The Process Objects in this group are often used to extend the functionality of other objects However they also can be used as standalone objects when necessary to implement a desired control scheme Add On Instruction Faceplate P_Gate Refinery Pipeline Flow Condition Gate Delay 4 Ea Inp Inp_Gate Global Object Input Condition Input Value On Delay Sec 0 Off Delay Sec 0 2 Output Status Faceplate Interlocks with First Out CEEE Home Operator abled E gt Fd Group Interlock Fi Group NB Interlock Fi Motor High Current Fa Motor Power Lost Fi Motor Overload Trip Add On Instruction Bd Pump High Case Temp Fi Flow Switch Mismatch Inp_IntlkO z Inp_IntlkO Inp_IntlkO Inp_IntlkO Inp_BypActive 0 1 2 z Inp_Intik03 4 5 6 Inp_LatchDefeat Inp_Reset a Ej High vibration P_Intlk Interlocks Inp_IntlkO Sts_IntlkOK Inp_IntIkO Sts_NBintIkOK v Local Interlocks Inp_IntlkO Sts_Intlk Sts_FirstOut Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Table 9 Cross Functional Process Object Description Object Elements Permissives with Bypass P_Perm Global Object Faceplate Th p p t ti d Pump P 1 Permissives i e P_Perm instruction is use to collect sum up the iP J be _ permissive conditions that FH Bypassed allow a pi
91. Mode Symbols and Indicators Graphic Symbol Description No Mode out of service Hand Local Device in Maintenance mode Override Device locked in Program mode Device locked in Operator mode Device in Program mode Device in Operator mode OD Gia eo Table 17 Status Symbols Graphic Symbol Description Device has been disabled At target speed Communication failure Accelerating Decelerating Input or PV uncertain The device is not ready to operate value is being initialized Oe O P 4 ONO Input has been disabled value has not changed stuck Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 51 Chapter1 Overview Table 17 Status Symbols Graphic Symbol E E E A a E DC Be v x Table 18 Alarm Symbols Graphic Symbol D A A I A Description Input has been rejected Value infinite or not a number Input CV clamped to minimum maximum Output CV clamped to minimum maximum information Output CV clamped to minimum maximum Speed reference limited to the minimum maximum Value clamped to minimum maximum Value is being held at the last good value Value is being replaced Input matches target Input does not match target Description Urgent High Medium Low Out of alarm Acknowledge required Alarm inhibit suppressed shelved or disabled In alarm alarm active 52 Rockwell Au
92. Noise Level and enter the P Tuning Limit and Autotune Timeout 4 Press the Autotune Start Button 5 Once the Autotune sequence completes check for and correct any errors before continuing 6 Select the desired Response Speed F Press the Use Autotune Values button to copy the selected values into the current CC Tags Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Internal Model Control IMC The Internal Model Control IMC function block controls a single process variable by manipulating a single control variable output This function block performs an algorithm where the actual error signal is compared against that of an internal first order lag plus deadtime model of the process The IMC function block calculates the control variable output CV in the Auto mode based on the PV SP deviation internal model and tuning Visualization Files The following files are required to use the IMC Object and can be downloaded from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support pcdc page IMPORTANT Files must be imported in the following order image files then global object files and then graphic files This order is required to properly configure the visualization files Table 53 Internal Model Control IMC Visualization File Types Application Type FileType Facto
93. OI L5X This instruction is given two Date Time points and determines the amount of time between them The result is given in days hours minutes seconds and microseconds Years and months are returned as zero as the number of months is generally not used The Date Time parameters must be valid Gregorian Dates and valid clock times 0 lt Microseconds lt 1 000 000 0 lt Seconds lt 60 This instruction cannot add leap seconds 0 lt Minutes lt 60 0 lt Hours lt 24 1 lt Day lt 31 and Date is a Valid Gregorian Date 1 lt Month lt 12 _ DoW Day of the Week T_DoW_1_0 00_AOI L5X This instruction takes a given Date Time and for the date part returns the day of the week 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 T hu 5 Fri 6 Sat If the given date is invalid a flag is set but the calculated day of the week is returned anyway IMPORTANT The time part of input parameter DT hours minutes seconds microseconds is ignored Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 169 Appendix D Additional Add On Instructions Table 40 Time and Date Instructions Short Description Long Description File Name Daylight Savings Time Name T_DST 170 This instruction manages Daylight Saving Time It uses a number of configuration values T_DST_1_0 01_AOI L5X to allow handling a wide variety of national and regional rules for when to start and end Daylight Saving Time o
94. OT Bitwise NOT 64 bit This instruction returns the bitwise Logical NOT inverse or 1 s complement of an input L_NOT_1_0 00_AOI L5X 64 bit integer LINT value It flips all the bits L_OR Bitwise OR 64 bit This instruction returns the bitwise Logical OR output bit true if either of the L_OR_1_0 00_AOI L5X corresponding input bits are true of two input 64 bit integers LINTs into an output 64 bit integer 166 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Table 39 Long Integer Instructions Short Description Long Description File Name Name L_OTE L_OTL L_OTU L_SEL L_SUB L_XIC L_XIO Output Energize 64 bit Output Latch 64 bit Output Unlatch 64 bit Select 64 bit Subtract 64 bit Examine On 64 bit Examine Off 64 bit Additional Add On Instructions Appendix D This instruction energizes the given bit of the referenced LINT 64 bit integer tag that is it sets the given bit true 1 if the Enableln condition is true or clears the given bit false 0 if the Enableln condition is false If the given bit number is outside the range 0 63 the controller major faults on an invalid array index bad bit number There is no validity checking of the given bit number This instruction latches the given bit of the referenced LINT 64 bit integer tag that is it sets the given bit true 1 if the Enableln condition is true or leaves the given bit and the re
95. OpenC Val_SlowClaseC Sts_SlowOpen Sts_SlowClose Sts_Err Val_ Val_ Val Va Val_Cp Val_Cp Val_Incp Val_Incp P_ValveStats 2 State Valve Statistics Inp_Closed Val_CurrClosedT Inp_Opened Val_LastClosedT Val_TotClosedT Val_MaxClosedT CurrOpeningT Global Object ClosingT Closing Closing Closing Faceplate alve Statistics stroke times counts Close State Ee Seo Lo ea ee eo Leer i D j P_nPaos n Position Device Inp_Pos1Fdbk Out_Pos1 fa Inp_Pos2F db Out_Pos2 fa Inp_Pos3Fdbk Out_Pos3 Inp_Pos4Fdbk Out_Pos4 fy Inp_Pos5F dbl Out_Pos5 Inp_Pos6Fdbk Out_Pos6 a Inp_Pos Fdbk Out_Pos f Inp_Pos F dbl Out_Pos8 9 Inp_PermOK Out_Inc Inp_NBPermOK Out_Dec fa amp Inp_IntIkOK Yal_Cmd D Inp_NBintlkkO Val_Fdbk D Val_Sts Val_Fault D Val_State D Sts_Pos1 Sts_Pos2 fa Sts_Pos3 fp Sts_Pos4 Sts_Pos5 A Sts_Pos6 fa Sts_Pos7 9 Sts_Pos a Sts_Moving 9 Sts_Err 9 Sts_Hand Sts_Maint a Sts_Ovwd Sts_Prog D Sts_Oper a Sts_PosFail Sts_LockFail f Sts_IntlkTrip Sts_lOFault 2 3 or 4 State Device E Inp_FdbkA Inp_FdbkB Inp_FdbkC mj Inp_FdbkD Inp_PermOKO m Inp_NBPermOKD Inp_PermOK1 Inp_NBPermOK1 Inp_PermOkK2 Inp_NBPermOK2 m Inp_PermOK3 Inp_NBPermOK3 m Inp_IntlkOK Ej Inp_NBintkkOkK Sts_Prog Sts_Oper Rockwell Automation Publi
96. PVTracking in manual mode when autotune is OFF Maintenance This parameter is ignored in Hand and Code C Override mode Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 189 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Maintenance Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the CC Maintenance tab shows the following information e Error scaled in PV units e Current process variable PV e Current setpoint e PV percent of span e SP percent of span Error scaled in Current PV PV Units Current Setpoint Error deg Bx aa 17 P deg Bx 0 46 00 SP deg Bx A EU Min Max 100 00 Autotune 0 00 are Autotune C 1 0 17 46 00 EYA Error 46 17 C1 Tuning C2 Tuning CV3 Tuning Gain 1 0000 gt Gain 1 0000 gt Gain 1 0000 gt Time Constant 0 0000 Seconds gt Time Constant 0 0000 Seconds gt Time Constant 0 0000 Seconds gt Dead Time 0 0000 Seconds Dead Time 0 0000 Seconds gt Dead Time 0 0000 Seconds gt RTC 0 0000 gt RTC 0 0000 gt RTC 0 0000 gt Target Value 0 0000 Target Value 0 0000 Target Value 0 0000 Calculated C1 Calculated CY2 Calculated C V3 Calculated Value Used on next page The following table shows the functions of page 2 of the CC Maintenance tab Table 47 CC Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description PV EU Min Max Type the maximum li
97. PYHHALarm E ley nanam in the ControlLogix system aid consistency and save engineering time FF l PV LLAlarm E HandFB PVROCPosAlarm S ProgProgReq PYROCNegAlarm E ProgOperReq DevHHAlarm D _ Display Element Description ProgCasRatReq DewHAlarm ProgAutoReg DewLAlarm f Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced object with one Process Variables and one Control Variable ProghtanualReq DevLLAlarm E Built In PIDE 22 BU D 0 00 M ProgOverrideReq ProgOper FE ProgHandReq CasRatE Auto f Manual FF Override E Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced object with Built In PIDE one Process Variable one Setpoint and one Control oau D Variable 60 00 IBU 0 00 M AutotuneTag GO_BuiltIn_ PIDE_CV Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced normal Control Valve for horizontal pipe object with one Process Variable and one Control Variable Built In FIDE 1 15 Barrels D 0 00 Mm GO_Builtln_PIDE_CV1 Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced inverted Puin eLE Control Valve for horizontal pipe object with one Process 0 85 Casks D Variable and one Control Variable 0 00 i GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV2 STE Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced Control a Valve for vertical pipe to the left object with one Process 0 87 Pints E Variable and one Control Variable 0 00 Mm GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV3 Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced Control Valve
98. Reference Manual Process Automation System Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects Version 3 1 K Ee AYY ETF e a i ps q oF s gt the EEA a ry ye k I Allen Bradley RockwellSoftwae Automation Important User Information Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation configuration and operation of this equipment before you install configure operate or maintain this product Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes laws and standards Activities including installation adjustments putting into service use assembly disassembly and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is
99. S RM002C EN P November 2014 Install Tool File Appendix C Color Change Utility This customizing tool lets you create a color palette to change the colors for FactoryTalk View software display elements global objects and faceplates The Color Change Utility uses three types of files e FactoryTalk View Graphics xml file This file is exported from the FactoryTalk View graphic display or global object in the View Studio software program Once changes are made it is imported into the View Studio software program to change the colors in the display or global object e Color Association File This xml file matches a color instance in the Factory Talk View Graphics xml file to the color palette entry There is one Color Association File CAXML for each FactoryTalk View Graphics xml file It is created and maintained by the utility e Color Palette This xml file defines the colors for an application It is created and maintained by the utility There is one color palette file for all of the Factory alk View Graphics xml files that are being customized If you want to change the color it is done in the color palette TIP We suggest that you make a copy of the color palette xml file if you plan to use the color tool The Color Change Utility can be downloaded with the Library of Process Objects from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support downloads
100. SYSLIB RM045 Analog Fanout P_Fanout The P_Fanout instruction fans one primary analog output Signal out to multiple secondary users or devices Each secondary output has configurable gain and offset The instruction applies minimum and maximum clamping limits to each output secondary CV Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM030 High or Low Selector P_HiLoSel The P_HiLoSel instruction selects the lowest of the up to 6 incoming CVs or the highest of the incoming CVs and outputs the value The unselected CVs are flagged to track the selected CV The tracking value can optionally be offset by an amount equal to the upstream PID PIDE Gain times Error to avoid problems with ever decreasing if low select or ever increasing if high select output Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM047 Overview Chapter 1 The Process Objects in this group provide regulatory control of a final Object Elements Global Object Faceplate Reboiler Steam Flow Control ae tn ee aA ok i i Home Operator AE Ad eg E Add On Instruction Auto 100 F 100 HHa 3 Proportional Integral Derivative 70 00 g Inp_PY Out_CV D A l men Inp_CascSP Yal_PV D 20 00 P SCFM Inp_Hand Val_SP D i el inp iko Val_CVSet aun Wed La 22 Inp_NBintIkOkK VYal_CVOut D 1 50 0 Val_Mode D Cr 10 8 LLa 2 8 Sts_Casc j Eo Sts_Auto Sts_Man P cv GRE V St
101. Signature I 4 Open Instruction Logic Open Instruction Definition Properties Alt Enter The New Tag dialog box appears 70 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 9 Type a description for your new backing tag and click Create Name Description Usage lt normal gt Alias For Data Type P_Motor Style E Constant Open Configuration 10 Connect the pins to add I O 11 Pump 1 Motor Scope ea Task_C_MainProgram x yale hecwee Read Write v Pump 1 Motor Pump_1 P_Motor ee Single Speed Motor c Inp_RunFdbk Inp_PermOK f E Inp_NBPermOK Out_Stop E Inp_IntikOK Sts_Stopped E E Inp_NBirtikOK Sts_Starting Sts_Running Sts_Stopping O O O S O O O O OO How to Install the Library Pump 1 Motor PUMP _1 P_Motor mw Singe Speed Motor amp Inp_RunFebk El Inp_ Per moK J Inp_hBPemOkK Out_Stop E inp ntik OK Sts_Stopped H Ej Inp_hBintkOK Sts_Starting D Sts _Running Sts _Stopping X Local 4 0 Data 0 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 oodoceoooajooe Fooo Repeat this process for each required Add On Instruction Chapter 2 The tag s description and name appear at the top of the function block 71 Chapter2 How to Install the Library Import Visualization Files Each Add On Instruction has associated visualizat
102. Software View ME Software Description Graphics Displays GFX RA BAS Common Analog Edit Faceplate used for analog input data entry The FactoryTalk View ME faceplates use the native analog input data entry so no file is required RA BAS Built In RMPS Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In RMPS Faceplate The faceplate display used for the RMPS object RA BAS Built In RMPS Help RA BAS ME Built In RMPS Help Help information that is accessed from the RMPS Help faceplate Graphics Global GGFX RA BAS Common Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME Common Faceplate Objects Common global objects used on all Process Objects Object faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Faceplate Objects Global objects used on RMPS faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Graphics Librarys RA BAS ME BuiltIn Graphics Librarys Built in display elements used to build process graphics RA BAS BuiltIn Help Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Help Objects Built in global objects used for all Built in help displays Graphics Images All png files in the images folder All png files in the images folder These are the common icons used in the global objects and faceplates for all Process Objects HMI Tags FTVME_PlantPAxLib_Tags_3_1_00 sy These tags must be imported into the FactoryTalk View ME project to support switching tabs on any Process Object faceplate 1 The service release number boldfaced can change as service revisions are created 248 Roc
103. Structured Text can give you an advantage of the more advanced process and drives instructions available in those languages You cannot compare execution times for the same Add On Instruction written in different programming languages There are fundamental differences on how the different languages execute and are compiled Ladder Diagram Considerations Although multiple programming languages are available to be used with the Library Add On Instructions Ladder Diagram has differences in behavior to consider The controller evaluates Ladder Diagram instructions based on the rung condition preceding the instruction rung in condition Based on the rung in condition and the instruction the controller sets the rung condition following the instruction rung out condition which affects any subsequent instruction input instruction output instruction rung in rung out condition condition 84 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 If the rung in condition to an input instruction is true the controller evaluates the instruction and sets the rung out condition based on the results of the instruction If the instruction evaluates to true the rung out condition is true if the instruction evaluates to false the rung out condition is false IMPORTANT The rung in condition is reflected in the Enableln parameter and determines how the system performs each Process Ad
104. TSat Ramp Soak RMPS 48 Hand operated Motor P_MotorH0 General Steam Table P_Steam Totalizer TOT 49 Discrete 2 3 or 4 state Device P_D4SD 26 Steam Properties Given Enthalpy and 39 Each object is explained in the following pages is used for motors and valves Entropy P_Steam_hs 14 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 1 0 Processing Overview Chapter 1 The Process Objects in this group provide analog and discrete input output signal processing Pressure temperature compensated flow calculation and cylindrical tank level interpolation are also provided Table 3 1 0 Processing Process Object Description Basic Analog Input P_Aln The P_Aln instruction monitors one analog value typically from a channel of an analog input module and provides alarms when the analog value exceeds user specified thresholds high and low This instruction also provides for linear scaling of an analog input value from raw input units to engineering output units and entry of a substitute Process Variable Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM001 Analog Input Channel P_AlChan The P_AlChan instruction monitors one analog input channel and provides a configurable failure alarm This instruction is usually associated with other instructions The P_AlChan faceplate is called from other faceplates such as the associated analog input instruction faceplate
105. a f A 1220 72 Gallons 779 20 Gallons Delivery Rate 0 10 GPM A Under Tolerance AD p I m A et P Remaining to Deliver Quantity Delivered Setpoint 2000 00 P_DoseFM Dosing with Weigh Scale An iE Faceplate Home Operator rator awe 99999999 Pounds 9999999 Pounds Remaining to Deliver Quantity Delivered Delivery Rate 0 00 Lb Min Scale Weight pA mp Tare eeo es 0 0 P Current 99999999 x Flow Stopped Setpoint er 150 00 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 23 Chapter1 Overview Notes 24 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Motors The Process Objects in this group provide control and monitoring of drives smart motor controllers and overload relays Table 6 Motors Process Object Description Single speed Motor P_Motor The P_Motor instruction controls a non reversing single speed motor in a variety of modes and monitors for fault conditions The motor can use a full voltage starter FVNR a soft starter or other motor protective equipment The instruction also provides run feedback and a display of actual motor status Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM006 Two speed Motor P_Motor2Spd The P_Motor2Spd instruction controls a non reversing two speed motor fast slow stopped in a variety of modes and monitors for fault con
106. ailToStart Com_AE 7 EEEE t Mix P50_Motor FailToS5tart Com_AE 8 v t Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 1 t Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 4 v EJE t Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Cfg_MaxShelfT Lid J 4 J J bI LK Lancet Hep control tag dialog boxes Description Type Path Object Alarm Com_AE 10 for the disable tag Leave the Auto Reset checkbox blank Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 10 Type Path Object Alarm Com_AE 11 for the enable tag Check the Auto Reset checkbox so the alarm automatically resets when acknowledged Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 11 Type Path Object Alarm Com_AE 7 for the suppress tag Leave the Auto Reset checkbox blank Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 7 Type Path Object Alarm Com_AE 8 for the unsuppress tag Check the Auto Reset checkbox so the alarm automatically resets when acknowledged Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 8 Type Path Object Alarm Com_AE 1 for the acknowledge tag Leave the Auto Reset checkbox blank Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 1 Type Path Object Alarm Com_AE 4 for the shelve tag Check the Auto Reset checkbox so the alarm automatically resets when acknowledged Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 4 Type Path Object Alarm Cfg_MaxShelf1 for the shelve duration tag Our example
107. al Add On Instructions Name Short Description Long Description File Name T_TtolSO Date to ISO Week Date This object converts a Date in common form Year Month Day to an ISO 8601 Week T_TtolSO_1 0 00 AOI L5X Date like 2014 W04 2 meaning Tuesday in the fourth week of Week Numbered Year 2014 for 2014 01 21 This object calculates the ISO Year ISO Week and ISO Day day of the week Note the ISO Day is specified as 1 Monday 7 Sunday This object also determines the number of weeks 52 or 53 in the calculated ISO Year The Date to convert is given in the Year Month and Day of the Ref_DT reference tag of type DateTime Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Microsecond The Week Numbered Year does not necessarily start on January 1 It can start from December 29 through January 4 The first week of an ISO Week Numbered Year is the week beginning with Monday and ending on Sunday that contains the first THURSDAY of the calendar year See Wikipedia ISO Week Date for more information T_Ttol DateTime to LTIME This instruction converts a DateTime year month day hour minute second T_Ttol_1_0 00_AOI L5xX microsecond as DINTs in Coordinated Universal Time UTC offset 0 to an LTIME 64 bit integer timestamp for example from an ALMD or ALMA instruction or the WALLCLOCKTIME object The output LTIME is the 64 bit LINT number of microseconds since DT 1970 01 01_00 00 00 0000 UTC T_TtoS Date Time to String This instruct
108. alization CY EU MincsMax Value in CV EU 100 00 0 00 Enable CY Tracking CV Initialization Value in CV EU Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 207 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The following table shows the functions of page 3 of the IMC Maintenance tab Table 58 IMC Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description Operator CV Value CV Operator Manual value in percent Normal Operation CVOper CV is set to this value when in Operator of Devices control and Manual mode Code A CV High Limit Type values for the CV high and low limits Configurationand e CVHLimit CV Low Limit Itis also used for limiting CV when in Auto Tuning e CVLLimit TASON or CascadeRatio modes or Manual mode if Maintenance CVManLimiting is true Code D CV RoC Positive CV increasing or decreasing rate of change e CVROCPosLimit Limit limit in percent per second e CVROCNegLimit The rate of change limiting is used only Negative when in Auto or CascadeRatio modes or m Manual mode if CVManLimiting is true A value of zero disables CV ROC limiting Override Type the value for the CV Override value CVOverrideValue CV is set to this value when in Override mode CV EU Maximum Type the maximum or minimum value Engineering e CVEUMax TUR for CVEU scaling Configuration e CVEUMin CV EU Minimum This the value of CVEU that corresponds to Code E 100 or 0 CV respectively Enable CV Tracking
109. alog box appears that explains the QuickBuild default build options Click Yes after reading about the settings when the XML file is imported to the AE alarm database The SaveAs AE Alarms Import XML File dialog box appears Choose where to save the file and type a file name IMPORTANT Choose a file location that is easily accessible such as your desktop because you need this XML file to complete the alarms process Click Save A message box appears that the file is created Click OK The Alarms Builder software automatically configures the AE tag s View command to display the associated Logix tag faceplate by passing it a parameter file with the tag address The parameter file is automatically generated by the software Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 137 Appendix B 138 Alarms Builder Tool Custom Build Custom Build lets you adjust settings by using a series of wizard like dialog boxes to walk through the build procedure You have the option to skip certain steps with the dialog boxes that provide the following procedures e Select the AE tags to synchronization with Logix tags e Select which Logix tags to use for building the AE alarms import file the Quick Build uses all controller tags that have alarm definitions e Organize Logix tags in user defined folders which can be used as prefixes in the AE tag names For example AE_InAlmUnackedCount e Associate HMI display
110. an performs the Process Add On Instruction s logic routine as all false and then performs its Prescan routine as true Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 85 Chapter3 Common Configuration Considerations TIP When hard coding configuration bits in Ladder Diagram instances of Add On Instructions we recommend using OTL output latch instructions for writing configuration bits to 1 and OTU output unlatch instructions for writing configuration bits to 0 Avoid using OTE output energize instructions for writing to Add On Instruction bits Because OTE is a non retentive instruction when the controller logic prescan occurs on Powerup or controller Program to Run transition the bit referenced in the OTE is cleared to zero Example You want the mode of a device to default to Program and you don t want anyone to be able to change this from the faceplate so you write code to set the Cfg_ProgDefault bit The prescan logic of the P_Mode Add On Instruction examines this bit and sets the Program Operator selection accordingly on Powerup Suppose you use an OTE instruction to hard code this configuration to 1 Program default The prescan of the OTE sets Cfg_ ProgDefault to 0 for the duration of prescan and the instruction powers up in Operator mode not the desired Program mode Using an OTL instruction to hard code this configuration the result is the desired action Powering up in Program mode Mode Configuratio
111. an ual Rag E Pra gCua nual Req E Fra gO Sa nual Rag g Pro glu Override Rag E Fr geremde Reg E Pra gE amida Rag GO_BuiltIn_CQ Ch mda nial DEMA nual GYS nual E CW4Owerids CuO rerida CWSIOwsrids fF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Display Elements A display element global object is created once and can be referenced multiple times on multiple displays in an application When changes are made to the original base object the instantiated copies reference objects are automatically updated Use of global objects in conjunction with tag structures in the ControlLogix system aid consistency and save engineering time lements Descriptions Display Element Description Coordinated Control object with a Process Variable and ce three Control Variables 0 17 deg BAM Do0 0 Do0 i M 0 00 Coordinated Control object with a Process Variable Setpoint and three Control Variables Ce O 17 deg BAM 46 00 deg Bx Do0 i Do0 i Do0 i Coordinated Control object with a Process Variable and a ae Setpoint 0 17 deg BAM 46 00 deg Bx Operator Tab The faceplate initially opens to the Operator Home tab From here an operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator mode The Operator tab shows the following information e Requested modes indicator e Current process variable and bar graph e Current control
112. anges that impact operation Changes that can be monitored include downloads online edits I 0 forcing and controller mode changes This instruction is provided as a rung import for installation Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM003 Logix Controller CPU Utilization L_CPU The L_ CPU instruction monitors a Logix controller and provides information on controller CPU utilization communication usage memory usage task scan times and other information Data provided by this instruction is useful in diagnosing communication or control responsiveness issues This instruction is provided as a rung import for installation Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM003 Logix Redundant Controller Monitor L_Redun The L_Redun instruction monitors one redundant pair of Logix controllers checking primary and secondary controller status that can impact the ability of the system to switch to the back up controller on a failure of the primary This instruction is provided as a rung import for installation Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM003 Object Elements No visualization elements are supplied with the L_ChangeDet instruction Global Object Process Objects GE Remote Run Add On Instruction _CPU_18 Processor Utilization v18 Cfg_ContTaskinstance Cfg_SlotNumber Cfg_UpdateT Ref_Out Ref_MsgSetWindow Ref_MsgGetTr
113. ar T_Valid_1 0 00 _AOI L5X date and clock time as follows 0 lt Microseconds lt 1 000 000 0 lt Seconds lt 60 This instruction cannot check leap seconds 0 lt Minutes lt 60 0 lt Hours lt 24 1 lt Day lt 31 and Day is Valid for Gregorian Date 28 29 30 or 31 days in month 1 lt Month lt 12 Year is within the range of dates that this instruction can calculate a Gregorian day number about 5 8 million years IMPORTANT This instruction does not switch to Julian dates for dates before 1582 or 1753 This instruction assumes the Gregorian Calendar extends indefinitely at least 5 8 million years either side of zero It does handle the Gregorian 4 100 400 year rules so Feb 29 2000 is a valid date but Feb 29 2100 is not Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 179 AppendixD Additional Add On Instructions Notes 180 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Appendix E HMI Security Codes Configuration FactoryIalk View software security codes protect information that is contained within HMI faceplates Operators maintenance personnel and engineers must have security permission to modify their respective faceplate tabs Display elements global objects have an associated faceplate that appears when the display element is clicked Variables setpoints alarms and other device configuration data is entered and viewed
114. arms dialog box shows the trigger variables for the selected tags Triggers for tag I _P1 note press the Tab or Enter key after making changes to Enabled or Label Export Trigger Type Name Label Expression d value Alrn_HiHi PA PCL Slot JI P41 Am HiHi TT lt 1 3 ee eee ee J The trigger variables and trigger messages lower portion of the dialog box use the default alarm configuration values if the synchronization option is not used Checkmarks default in the Export checkboxes for Logix tag elements with HasAlarm set to 1 To edit the triggers check or clear the checkboxes for the selected trigger values C Define Message amp Colors The message name and color for the alarm trigger are maintained in the lower portion of the dialog box SSS Ss SS Topi ip LOE Alene HA ingot Fike 1 Click Name and Message cells to edit the text boxes 2 Click Background and Foreground cells to change the colors 3 Click Export to ME Alarms XML Import File to select a trigger variable 154 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B The Export ME Alarms XML File dialog box appears The file s directory defaults to the ME HMI project directory EE Enport ME Alarms PML Pie OOOO JO r All Users Documents RSView Enterprise SE HMI Projects LYU_MosquitoStations_V3 v v Search LyU_MosquitoStations A Organize
115. associations to the selected object This option is not available if the selected object is a group that has members with color associations e Paste Color Associations to all group members Use this function to paste the previously copied color associations to the new object and all of its members This option is available only if the source and destination objects are groups with members that have similar names and object types e Copy and Paste Color Associations to Similar Objects with Names like Xxxx This option copies the selected object and searches objects with a similar name and object type Color associations are copied to all objects with similar names and types in any of the currently open graphics files If the objects are groups then the group members must have similar names and object types Be careful when you use this feature to prevent unwanted changes 164 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Appendix D Additional Add On Instructions Long Integer and Time The Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects provides additional sets of Instructions Add On Instructions because the Logix firmware does not provide operations on Long Integers LINT 64 bit signed integers used as timestamps The instructions in Table 39 provide 64 bit integer match functionality for the library objects The long integer instructions are calculation functions only and no HMI components are provided
116. assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence gt gt IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures ARC FLASH HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a motor control center to alert people to potential Arc Flash Arc Flash will cause severe inju
117. ates bulk configuration Table 34 summarizes the P_Alarm alarm types that are used with the Library and indicates which objects use the alarm Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 87 Chapter 3 Common Configuration Considerations Table 34 P_Alarm Types by Library Objects Alarm Type ActuatorFault i AnyReject l DeviceFault I Diff DriveFault E EqpFault H Fail FailToStart E FailToStop E FullStall Hi 88 Alarm Description Raised if the Inp_ActuatorFault input is true This is provided for use by valves that generate a fault contact such as actuator motor overload trip At least one input signal has been rejected because of the following e It s outside the configured failure range e It s outside of two standard deviations from the mean e Has its Bad Quality input bit set e Has a floating point value that is infinite or not a number floating point exception Device fault from device via an input The difference between the two input signals exceeds the configured high difference warning limit Raised if the Inp_Faulted input is true Enables display of the Drive Fault code Raised if the controlled equipment asserts the Inp_CtrldEqpFault input or if the equipment feedback signals fail to track the commanded state of the equipment If configured as a shed fault this also stops flow if it is running PV quality is bad Inp_PVBad is true or PV is beyond configur
118. ation Files The following files are required to use the Built In PIDE Object and can be downloaded from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support pcdc page IMPORTANT Files must be imported in the following order image files then global object files and then graphic files This order is required to properly configure the visualization files Table 70 Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced PIDE Visualization File Types Application Type FileType FactoryTalk View SE Software View ME Software Description Graphics Displays GFX RA BAS Common Analog Edit Faceplate used for analog input data entry The FactoryTalk View ME faceplates use the native analog input data entry so no file is required RA BAS Built In PIDE Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In PIDEFaceplate The faceplate display used for the PIDE object RA BAS Built In PIDE Help RA BAS ME Built In PIDEHelp Help information that is accessed from the PIDE Help faceplate RA BAS Built In PIDE Quick RA BAS ME Built In PIDE Quick The Quick display used for the PIDE object Optional Graphic RA BAS Built In Autotune Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In Autotune Faceplate The faceplate display used for the Displays Autotune object RA BAS Buit In Autotune Help RA BAS ME Buit In Autotune Help Help information that is accessed from the PIDE Autotune Help faceplate Graphics Global GGFX
119. ble P_StrapTbl The P_StrapTbl instruction calculates the volume of product in an upright cylindrical tank given the level of the product and the tank calibration table This instruction can optionally compensate for free water at the bottom of the tank givena product water interface level or for thermal expansion of the tank shell given the coefficient of linear expansion of the shell material and product and ambient temperatures Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM033 Overview Chapter 1 Object Elements The P_StrapTbl Instruction is intended as a calculation function only between other blocks and no HMI components are provided Add On Instruction P_StrapTbl strapping Table Inp_Level O Inp_F Level Cfg_CalTbl Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 19 Chapter1 Overview Notes 20 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Regulatory Control process element Table 4 Regulatory Control Process Object Description Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced P_PIDE The P_PIDE instruction provides the functionality of the PIDE built in instruction for PID loop control and additional alarm status information including limits and severities Use this instruction when you plan to use the PIDE for loop control and provide visualization to the operator Click the link to access the Reference Manual
120. cal tags Therefore you must type the last part of the input tag Com_AE 0 IMPORTANT A simple method to generate the alarm name especially in an editing tool like Microsoft Excel is to remove the communication path shortcut and replace the dot separating the tag name and the alarm Status parameter name with an underscore _ For example the input tag Mix P50_Motor Alm_FailToStart becomes alarm name P50_Motor_Alm_FailToStart Condition From the Condition pull down menu choose Input lt gt 0 Severity Choose an alarm severity that aligns with the severity in the controller and is shown on the HMI faceplate Severity values include the following Severity on Faceplate A amp E Severity 1 250 Low 1 250 251 500 Medium 251 500 501 750 High 501 750 751 1000 Urgent 751 1000 IMPORTANT The Alarms Builder tool works with Library versions 2 0 3 0 and 3 1 The mapping shown above is for version 3 1 that has a range from 1 1000 INT data type For Add On Instructions version 3 0 and earlier the severity values are in the range of 1 4 SINT data type When an ACD file that contains version 3 0 Add On Instructions is updated with version 3 1 Add On Instructions the Add On Instruction tags retain their existing severity values 1 4 Minimum duration Set to zero Alarm on delay and off delay timing is handled by the controller Latched Leave blank Alarm latching reset required is handle
121. cation PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 2 oe E Failed to Moving Average Completed Complete last 10 Strokes 2 1 ea 70 75 secs Open Strokes 2 0 07 18 25 secs 0 0 2 Count Last Stroke Slow Close Strokes 2 OK corm Slow Open Strokes 1 Slow 0 07 Current Time Last Time Max Time Total Time in State in State in State in State Closed 3 75 secs 3 54E 3 hrs 9 58E 3 hrs Closing 1 25 secs 140 25 secs 0 07 hrs Opened 74928 21 secs 4 00 secs 391 06 hrs 3244 30 hrs Opening 34 50 secs 34 50 secs 0 01 hrs A faa 0 07 P_ValveStats Global Object To d Faceplate n Position Device yea ela Home Operator i fall mim a My_P_nPos Faceplate Discrete 2 3 or 4 State Device he A O 63 Home Operator ane ple gt Open D gt amp Notes Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 37 Chapter1 Overview Steam Table 38 The Process Objects in this group provide steam table calculations Table 8 Steam Table Steam Object Description Saturated Steam Pressure P_ PSat The P_ PSat instruction calculates the absolute pressure in MPa or psia of saturated steam given the temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit It also provides the liquid and vapor enthalpy entropy and specific volume at the given temperature Click the link to access the Refer
122. cess Objects AzS es dela Remote Run Processor Present OK lO Forces Controller Properties Shortcut CLX_Slot2 Name ProcessObjects_3 0 03 Time 12 04 2013 10 40 08 467 am Firmware Revision 18 12 Module 1756 L75 A LOGIX5575 Minor Faults 0 Communication Comm Time Slice 20 0 Bi CPU Available for Comms 75 1 E CPU Used by Comms 1 6 Optimized Packets 96 Max Opt Packets Used 96 Opt Packets Max Instance 96 Faceplate a Sync Run Sync Remote Switchover Idle Logix Controller Redundancy Monit A Upper Chassis a Lower Chassis Primary Run Primary Remote Fully Compatible Sync Idle A J I Size of Last Transfer 5720 Maximum Transfer Size 118138 Qualification Progress 100 64 Bit Math Time and Date Math Table 10 Diagnostic Objects Process Object Description Logix Task Monitor L_TaskMon The L_TaskMon instruction monitors one task running ina Logix controller to provide task Statistics such as task scan time and overlap count This instruction also provides task configuration settings task plan execution time and alarm if the planned execution time is exceeded Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM003 Object Elements Global Object SSSSSSSSSsssss a HHRRHRE HF HHRRHEE HF HHRRHRH HF HHRRHRH HH Add On Instruction L_TaskMon Logix Task Monitor z Inp_Reset Val_Rate Val_Priority Val_La
123. ck Run Two status boxes appear during the replacement operation Status Search anc replace tags in controller ProcessObjects_3_1_00 Please wait Getting tag data for ProcessObjects_3_1_00 EAL_P3 Cfg_TgtDisagreeSeverity No change made Severity 750 Please wait Getting tag data for ProcessObjects_3_1_00 FAL_P3 Cfg_TgtDisagreeSeverity No change made Severity 750 Please wait Getting tag data for ProcessObjects_3_1_00 FIC_P3 Cfg_HiHiDevSeverity No change made Severity 750 Cfg_HiDevSeverity No change made Severity 500 Tags with successfully updated severity values Tag Name Parameter Old Value New Value The top table provides status and error messages The bottom table provides a listing of tag values that are changed if any 5 Click Save 2 Associate HMI The HMI association provides the information data area name device shortcut name needed in the AE tag addresses 1 Ifyou have multiple controllers click the to expand the Logic Controllers node 2 Right click on a controller file and from the pull down menu choose Select or Change Associated FactoryTalk View HMI gt Browse for HMI Application use if local or remote FactoryTalk View installed File View Tools Windows Help D a led Gf Logix Controllers ee ProcessObjectcmuem na i W HMI Alarm Servers ied al er Controller Properties Edit Controller Logix Description Format Open Controller in Child Window Open Cont
124. configure a library instance 1 In the Factorylalk View Studio software program open the global objects ggfx file that contains the graphics library for the instruction 2 Click and drag a global object onto the Studio software display file Disabled x n PSE EERE ESS eo re RA BAS P_Motor Graphics Library PlantPAxLibrary3 Global Objects RA BAS P_Motor Graphics Library qgtx Version 3 0 00 Release F Motor Display Elements for use on overview and detail displays Disabled Disabled Disabled xp Disabled Disabled k Ox 7 essssssssssssYD Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 113 Chapter4 Use the Library 3 In the display file right click the global object file and choose Global Object Parameter Values The Global Object Parameter Values dialog box appears You need to configure the first second and fifth parameters The third and fourth parameters are optional and differ in syntax depending on whether using a FactoryTalk SE or ME application See page 107 for details Global Object Parameter Yalues 114 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Use the Library Chapter 4 The global object parameters are as follows Parameter Required Description 0 Always show faceplate 1 Show Quick Display for users without Maintenance access Code C 2 Always show Quick Display 102 Y Object
125. copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 9 Preface Notes 10 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Chapter 1 Overview Welcome and thank you for selecting the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects The Library is a predefined collection of coded objects that offer proven strategies functionality and known performance for your process control system The library features a variety of instructions for motors valves drives interlocks permissives and additional objects that can be used with the PlantPAx system However using the library objects is not equivalent to designing a PlantPAx system To have a PlantPAx system you must use the PlantPAx Selection Guide publication PROCES SG001 to properly size your system and use the PlantPAx Reference Manual publication PROCES RMO0O01 to implement system guidelines Library elements include controller code Add On Instructions display elements global objects and faceplates that provide controller ready logic and visualization tools for the operator Add On Instruction Faceplate Display P Motor Product Transfer Pump Single Speed Motor AN A x a Inp_RunFdbk Out_Run 19 v4 a 9 x Out_Statt P Home Operator S Inp_NBPermOK Out_Stop apna a ef Inp_IntlkOK Sts Stoppe
126. d M Inp_NBIntlkkOk Sts_ Starting amp Sts_Running m eee ree gt me o Sts_Maint lt w oe e Display Element Stopped x The table describes the topics in this chapter Topic Page Library Benefits 12 Using Library Object Documentation 13 Standard Symbols and Indicators 50 Standard Buttons 55 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 11 Chapter1 Overview Library Benefits Using the Library of Process Objects offers these benefits e Provides reusable engineering designs with modular programming code e Simplifies process development with controller ready logic e Provides visualization of device and diagnostic information Reusable design The instruction set lets you control monitor and troubleshoot the process with little added engineering effort Add On Instructions provide modules of code with predefined functionality to monitor and control devices Developing a system becomes configuring the ready made objects rather than having to design functionality for each particular tool Simplified development Each instance of an instruction can be configured without changing the source definition Each instruction has been designed to satisfy a broad range of users Once the visualization elements are added to your project you can configure devices from the associated faceplates rather than having to open controller tags Visualization of real time da
127. d On Instruction If the Enableln signal is true the system performs the instruction s main logic routine Conversely if the Enableln signal is false the system performs the instruction s EnablelnFalse routine The instruction s main logic routine sets clears the EnableOut parameter which then determines the rung out condition The EnablelnFalse routine cannot set the EnableOut parameter If the rung in condition is false then the EnableOut parameter and the rung out condition also is false Prescan During the transition into Run mode the controller performs a Prescan before the first logic scan Prescan is a special scan of all routines in the controller The controller scans all main routines and subroutines during Prescan but ignores jumps that could skip the execution of instructions The controller executes all FOR loops and subroutine calls Ifa subroutine is called more than once it is executed each time it is called The controller uses Prescan of built in instructions to reset non retentive data values During Prescan input values are not current and outputs are not written The following conditions generate Prescan e Toggle from Program to Run mode e Automatically enter Run mode from a power up condition Prescan does not occur for a program when the following occurs e Program becomes scheduled while the controller is running e Program is unscheduled when the controller enters Run mode IMPORTANT _ The Presc
128. d by the controller Acknowledge required Make sure there is a check in the checkbox Alarm auto acknowledgement for alarms configured as Ack Not Required from the faceplate is handled by the controller Show Alarm as a Tag Leave blank Message Type a message optional into the text box Associated tags Type any associated tags optional into the text box Alarm Class Choose a classification optional from the pull down menu for alarm grouping and filtering FactoryTalk View Command Type a FactoryTalk View command that accesses a faceplate when you double click an alarm for a particular object on an A amp E Alarm Summary dialog box The command is configured as this example Display faceplate display name TPath object The name of the display must be inside double quotes because it contains a space 5 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 The digital alarm configuration information appears on the Alarm and Event Setup dialog box Fl Ala ey Setup RNA olex tal All Alarms Digital Level Deviation Messages Tag Update Rates Ack Req d WI om_i v im_FailToStart Digital fan Alarms 494 items Default max shelve time 480 Minutes Add Digital Alarm Status Tags The status tags configuration sends to the controller any shelved unshelved disabled enabled suppressed un
129. d cannot control the loop and cannot control the loop Mode Indicators P Device in Program Mode 0 Device in Operator Mode m Override H Hand Local Level Indicators a High Level Exceeded we Lov Level Exceeded Commands Program Control Request jel Operator Control Request M Request Manual Loop Mode A Request Auto Loop Mode p Available when in Operator Available when in Operator Control Control Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 PV1 Autotuned Values p Autotune C 1 for MMC Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Modular Multivariable Control MMC Autotune The faceplates in this section let you access all of the necessary parameters to autotune the MMC function block as well as hand tune the instruction MMC Autotune Operator Tab The MMC Autotune Operator tab shows the following information e Approximation Factor For PV1 and PV2 e Autotuned Gain Time Constant and Dead Time for PV1 and PV2 e Response Time Constant for slow response medium response and fast response speeds for PV1 and PV2 e Load selected parameters into CV configuration parameters buttons for PV1 and PV2 e Start CV autotune button e Stop CV autotune button Start Autotune Command Button Stop Autotune Command Button MA Process Type Integrating Non Integrating C1 Step Size 10 0000 wi P1 P2 Ready R
130. d into two pages Trends Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the CC Trends tab trends values of PV and SP over time C C EEN ajel 2 PY x10 m SP 100 00 75 00 Green PV 00 Blue SP 25 0 0 00 3 03 58 PM 3 05 58 PM a Da LUJ Le Ler Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 195 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Trends Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the CC Trends tab trends values of CV1 CV2 and CV3 over time y yiela o s 4 2 me cy Ltends m CV 2 mm CV 3 100 00 75 00 Violet V3 Blue CV2 25 00 Black Vi yy 0 00 2 51 56 PM 2 53 56 PM aa Leal La La Lad Ce Lee Alarms Tab The CC Alarms tab shows all the available alarms for the device and their current status oje 196 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Faceplate Help The Faceplate Help page shows the indicators and command buttons that are used by the Coordinated Control CC faceplate CC Faceplate Help E k Status Indicators E4 Invalid Configuration x Communication Failure Stale A Auto Loop Mode M Manual Loop Mode The CY has reached a high limit The CY has reached a low limit and cannot control the loop and cannot control the loop Mode Indicators P Device in Program Mode O Device in Operator Mode r Override H Hand Local Level Indicators m H
131. d into two tabs Engineering Tab Page 1 ney Maer Engineering Jf Allow Cascade Ratio Mode Use ratio control when in Cascade Ratio mode Limit C in Manual Mode Place instruction in Manual mode while CYlnitializing is set Reset Program Inputs after each execution Dependent Control Use dependent form of PID equation Jf Use Dervative Smoothing Calculate the derivative term using the change in the process variable Calculate the proportional term using the change in the process variable Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 241 Appendix F 242 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The following table shows the functions of page 1 of the Engineering tab Table 77 PIDE Engineering Tab Page 1 Description Function Allow Cascade Ratio Mode Use ratio control when in Cascade Ratio mode Limit CV in Manual Mode Place instruction in Manual mode while CVInitializing is set Reset program inputs after each execution Dependent Control Use dependent form of PID equation Use Derivative Smoothing Calculate the derivative term using the change in the process variable Calculate the proportional term using the change in the process variable Check to enable Cascade Ratio mod Engineering AllowCasRat to be selected Configuration Code E Check to enable ratio control when in Cascade Ratio mode UseRatio Check to limit CV in th
132. data over time These faceplate trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement but not replace dedicated historical or live trend displays The Trends tab is divided into two pages Trends Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the IMC Trends tab shows the relationship between PV and SP for the same time frame of a process Blue SP Green PV Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Trends Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the IMC Trends tab shows the output CV waveform oO E 2 m Output C 75 00 50 00 25 00 0 00 10 15 14 AM 10 17 14 AM ma La Ca moe Ce ee Le Alarms Tab The IMC Alarms tab shows all the available alarms for the device A peal ole Alarms I LLA P Low Alarm CV Low Alarm CY ROC Positive Alarm CV ROC Negative Alarm Ratio High Alarm Ratio Low Alarm Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 213 Appendix F 214 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Faceplate Help The Faceplate Help page shows the indicators and command buttons that are used by the Internal Model Control IMC faceplate IMC Faceplate Help Status Indicators E4 Invalid Configuration x Communication Failure Stale A Auto Loop Mode M Manual Loop Mode A Auto Loop Mode cascade enabled Cascade Loop Mode The CY has reached a high limit T
133. day of week to fall back 1 1st 2 2nd 5 last Cfg_BackDoW Day of the week to fall back 0 Sun 6 Sat Cfg_BackDoM Day of month for fall back if on a fixed date 1 31 Cfg_BackDoWBefore Day of the week BEFORE the first last day of week or date 0 S un 6 Sat Cfg_BackHr Hour LOCAL to fall back 0 23 Cfg_BackMin Minute LOCAL to fall back 0 59 Cfg_BackFixedDate 1 Fall back on fixed date O on occurrence of day of week Cfg_BackUseBefore 1 Fall back on day of week before date or day of week Cfg_ Offset Number of minutes to spring forward or fall back 0 1439 def 60 Cfg_EnableDST 1 Automatically adjust clock for DST 0 Always Standard Time no DST Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Additional Add On Instructions Appendix D Configuration Values for T_DST for Sample Rulesets T_DST was tested in each of these configurations Second Sunday Last Sunday in Saturday before For 2014 Last Friday Last Sunday in Second Sunday in oar n in March at 02 00 March at 01 00 Last Sunday in March 30 at before April 2 at September at March at 00 01 Png F orMard Rue Local UTC March at 23 00 02 00 Local 02 00 Local 02 00 Local Local advance 2 UTC hours Cfg FwdMo 3 a a S a a S S G 3 CO a Re 2 Cig FwdDow te S o f O Ek C Fwon J o o So S T o e 2 o S ST Cig_FwdDowBefore T T 6e J T 5 C F
134. dd On Instruction Reference Manual to configure these parameters if applicable 108 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 Quick Display Most library objects that have faceplates have Quick displays as well The Quick display is much smaller than the PlantPAx faceplate but still has all of the information and controls needed by the operator Motor Lontrol ra Clicking the View Faceplate icon shows the full faceplate Saving Your Data in FactoryTalk View SE Software When entering data into string Input fields in FactoryIalk View SE software the data is not saved to the tag until you press Enter When the Input field is active its border changes based on the state of the input e When the Input field is active the cursor is in the field the Input field border is a solid line EXAMPLE Active input field with cursor e Ifyou modify the data in the Input field and move to a different field without pressing Enter the border remains a solid line This indicates that the data has not been saved to the tag EXAMPLE Data entered but not saved e Ifthe data in the Input field has not changed or has been written to the controller tag the border is a dashed line EXAMPLE Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 109 Chapter3 Common Configuration Considerations Maintain Library Releases Each library object
135. dding Controller Logic An Add On Instruction is defined once in each controller project and can be instantiated multiple times in your application code To use the Add On Instructions you import them into a controller project Do these steps for each Add On Instruction 1 In RSLogix 5000 software open a new or existing project IMPORTANT Add On Instruction definitions can be imported but not updated online 2 Right click the Add On Instructions folder in the Controller Organizer and choose Import Add On Instruction Pe IP PP ALES Mo Add On Instruction oS Data Types Us New Add On Instruction oo User Defined Import Add On Inst E Strings 66 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 How to Install the Library The Import Add On Instruction dialog box appears 3 Select the Add On Instruction and click Import Chapter 2 el Import Add On Instruction Look in P Process Add On Instructions P_AlChan_3_1 02_AOLL5X E P_Aln_3_1 02_AOLL5X E P_AlnAdv_3_1 02_AOLL5X P_AlnDual_3_1 02_A01LL5X E P_AlnMulti_3_1 02_A01LL5X E P_Alarm_3_1 02_AOLL5X E P_AOut_3_1 02_A01LL5X u E P_D4SD_3_1 02_AOLL5X E P_DIn_3_1 02_AOLL5X re Recent Places Desktop Libraries te P_DoseFM_3_1 02_ AOLLSX E P_DoseWS_3_1 02_A01LL5X is E P_DOut_3_1 02_AOLL5X mi E P _E1PlusE_3_1 02_AOLL5X Computer P_E1PlusE_3_1 02_RUNG L5X G i Pp H te P_E3Ovld_3_1 02_AOLL5X P_E30vld_3_1
136. delGain This is the internal model gain for CV Maintenance CV3PV1ModelGain PV enter a positive or negative gain Code D e CV1PV2ModelGain depending on the process direction CV2PV2ModelGain CV3PV2ModelGain Model Time Type the internal model time constant for CVIPV1ModelTC Constant seconds PV1 CV1 CV2 or CV3 PV2 CV1 CV2 or V2PV1ModelTC CV3 in seconds CV3PV1ModelTC CV1PV2ModelTC CV2PV2ModelTC e CV3PV2ModelTC Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 223 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Table 66 MMC Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description Model Deadtime Type the internal model deadtime for PV1 Configurationand e CV1PV1ModelDT CV1 CV2 or CV3 PV2 CV1 CV2 or CV3 Tuning e CV2PV1ModelDT in seconds Maintenance e V3PV1ModelDT Code D V1PV2ModelDT e CV2PV2ModelDT CV3PV2ModelDT Response Time Type the internal Response time constant e CVIPV1RespIC Constant seconds for PV1 CV1 CV2 or CV3 PV2 CV1 CV2 CV2PV1RespTC or CV3 CV3PV1RespIC This is the tuning parameter that e CV1IPV2RespIC determines the speed of the control e CV2PV2RespTC variable action for CV PV in seconds CV3PV2RespIC Engineering Tab The Engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges options for device and I O setup displayed text and faceplate to faceplate navigation settings for init
137. der image files then global object files and then graphic files This order is required to properly configure the visualization files Table 84 Totalizer TOT Visualization File Types Application Type FileType FactoryTalk View SE Software View ME Software Description Graphics Displays GFX RA BAS Common Analog Edit Faceplate used for analog input data entry The FactoryTalk View ME faceplates use the native analog input data entry so no file is required RA BAS Built In Totalizer Help RA BAS ME Built In Totalizer Help Help information that is accessed from the Totalizer Help faceplate Optional Graphic RA BAS Built In Totalizer Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In TotalizerFaceplate The faceplate display used for the Displays Totalizer object RA BAS Built In TotalizerIgt Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In TotalizerFaceplate The faceplate display used for the Totalizer object Graphics Global GGFX RA BAS Common Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME Common Faceplate Objects Common global objects used on all Process Objects Object faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Faceplate Objects Global objects used on Totalizer faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Graphics Librarys RA BAS ME BuiltIn Graphics Librarys Built In display elements used to build process graphics RA BAS Builtin Help Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Help Objects Built In global objects used for all BuiltIn help displays Graphics Images All
138. ditions The motor can optionally have run feedback that if available is used to confirm that the motor is running at the commanded speed and alarm if not Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM012 Reversing Motor P_MotorRev The P_MotorRev instruction controls a reversing motor FVR forward reverse stopped motor in a variety of modes and monitors for fault conditions This instruction can optionally have run feedback that if available is used to confirm that the motor is running in the commanded direction and alarm if not Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM013 Object Elements Global Object stopped E Add On Instruction P_Motor Single Speed Motor a Inp_RunFdbk Inp_PermOK Inp_NBPermOK m Inp_IntlkkOK Inp_NBintlkOkK Out_Run Out_Start Out_Stop Sts_ Stopped Sts_ Starting Sts_Running Sts_ Stopping Sts_Err Sts_Hand Sts_Maint Sts_Ovrd Sts_Prog Sts_Oper H Global Object Stopped Add On Instruction P_Motor2Spd Two Speed Motor z Inp_SlowRunF dbk z Inp_FastRunFdbk Inp_SlowPermOK Inp_SlowNBPermOK 3 Inp_FastPermOK 3 Inp_FastNBPermOK z Inp_IntIkOK Inp_NBIntIikOK z Inp_Reset Out_RunSlow Out_RunFast Sts_Stopped Sts_StartingSlow Sts_StartingFast Sts_RunningSlow Sts_RunningFast Sts_Stopping Sts_Err Sts_Hand Sts_Maint Sts_Ovrd Sts_Prog Sts_Oper Global Object S
139. duct Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support pcdc page IMPORTANT Files must be imported in the following order image files then global object files and then graphic files This order is required to properly configure the visualization files Table 62 Modular Multivariable Control MMC Visualization File Types Application Type FileType FactoryTalk View SE Software aoa View ME Software Description Graphics Displays GFX RA BAS Common Analog Edit Faceplate used for analog input data entry The FactoryTalk View ME faceplates use the native analog input data entry so no file is required RA BAS Built In MMC Autotune Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In MMC Autotune Faceplate The faceplate display used for the Autotune object RA BAS Buit In MMC Autotune Help RA BAS ME Built In MMC Autotune Help Help information that is accessed from the MMC Autotune Help faceplate RA BAS Built In MMC Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In MMC Faceplate The faceplate display used for the MMC object RA BAS Built In MMC Help RA BAS ME Built In MMC Help Help information that is accessed from the MMC Help faceplate RA BAS Built In MMC RA BAS Built In MMC Quik RA BAS ME Built In MMC RA BAS ME Built In MMC Quick The Quick display used for the MMC object Graphics Global GGFX RA BAS Common Faceplate a RA BAS ME Common Faceplate ae C Common global objects used on a
140. e 210 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Engineering Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the Engineering tab has various Operator inputs options for the PV CV and Timing Execution mode The following values are displayed e RTS period e Oversample delta t e Time used to calculate output IMC PY c Maximum El 100 00 100 00 Mininnum El 0 00 0 00 CY Value in Override Mode 0 00 Timing execution mode Periodic Qversarnpling Real Time RTS Period rns Oversample At seconds 0 000 Elapsed time in seconds used to 125 calculate the process output The following table shows the functions of page 2 of the IMC Engineering tab Table 60 IMC Engineering Tab Page 2 Description Maximum Type the maximum or minimum scaled Engineering e PVEUMax Minimum EU value for PV Configuration e CVEUMax PV Type the maximum and minimum value Code E e PVEUMin CV of CV This is the value of CVEU that e CVEUMin corresponds to 100 or 0 of CV CV Value in Override Type the CV Override value CVOverrideValue Mode CV is set to this value when in Override mode Timing execution Click to select the time base execution TimingMode mode mode Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 211 Appendix F 212 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Trends Tab The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device
141. e including a multiple speed motor or a multiple position valve The instruction controls up to four discrete outputs with configurable states of each output in the various device states and monitors up to four discrete feedback inputs Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM028 Object Elements Global Object Faceplate P_MotorHO Hand Operated Motor Disabled we o Add On Instruction P_MotorHO wj Hand Operated Motor Inp_RunFastFwdF dbk Inp_SlowRevF dbk Inp_IntIikOK Inp_NBintlkOk Inp_Reset Out_Trip a Sts_RunningFastFwd Sts_RunningSlowRey Sts_Stopped Sts_Tripping Sts_Err E Global Object Faceplate sping Discrete 2 3 or 4 State Device nay ae P CE Home Operator r M 0 gt Gf gt Ofes gt P Gh v ae ane Add On Instruction P_D4SD 2 3 or 4 State Device Inp_FdbkA Inp_Fdbke z Inp_FdbkD z Inp_PermOKO z Inp_NBPermOkKO Inp_PermOk1 z Inp_NBPermOkK1 Inp_PermOkK2 z Inp_NBPermOkK2 m Inp_PermOK3 z Inp_NBPermOK3 E Inp_IntIkkOK Ej Inp_NBintkkOkK Sts_Ovrd Sts_Prog 9 Sts_Oper Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Table 6 Motors Process Object Description Object Elements PowerFlex 523 525 Drives P_PF52x Global Object Faceplate The P_PF52x instruction is used to control and monitor a P
142. e Manual mode CVManLimiting Check to set the Loop mode to manual ManAfterlnit when CV initialization is requested Clear the checkbox to leave the Loop mode unchanged when initialization is requested When the initialization request clears the loop resumes control in its previous Loop mode Click to clear all program request inputs after each execution of the instruction ProgValueReset Click to use the dependent form of the PID equation Clear this checkbox to use the independent form of the equations Click to smooth changes in the derivative term Dependindepend DSmoothing PVEDerivative Click to calculate the derivative term DeltaDTerm by using the change in the process variable PVPercent Clear this checkbox to use the change in error EPercent Click to calculate the derivative term DeltaDTerm by using the change in process variable PVPercent Clear this checkbox to use the change in error EPercent PVEProportional Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Engineering Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the PIDE Engineering tab shows the following information e RTS Period milliseconds e Oversampling seconds e Elapsed time in seconds used to calculate the process output e Operator inputs for Control Action and Timing Execution mode ngineerin Built In PIDE Oe Control Action
143. e a value for the tuning parameter that determines the speed of the control variable action for CV1 CV2 or CV3 in seconds Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Table 52 CC Autotune Operator Tab Description Function Security Click to replace the current model parameters with the Configuration and Tuning calculated Autotune model parameters Maintenance Code D Click to start the autotune process for CV1 CV2 or CV3 Click to abort the autotune process This button also becomes active if the process is aborted due to an error CC Autotune Alarms Tab The Autotune Alarms tab shows all the available alarms for the device and their current status Autotune C 1 for CC fy A 5l Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 199 Appendix F 200 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions CC Autotune Faceplate Help The Faceplate Help page shows the indicators and command buttons that are used by CC Autotune CC Autotune Faceplate Help Commands x lt i Autotune Start m Abort Autotune Use Autotune Values Copy the selected E tuning values into the current IMC Gain Time Constant Dead Time and Response Time Constant Instructions Select Process Type and enter the CW s Step Size 2 Enter the Approximation Factor if using Integrating Process Type 3 Select the
144. eadband Type a value in engineering units that the SoakDeadband PV is allowed to differ from the output when GuarSoak is on Trends Tab Page 1 of the PIDE Trends tab shows the relationship between PV F and the output for the same time period Ramp Soak AE me F deg F EE Output Output Green PV Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 253 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Faceplate Help The faceplate Help page shows the indicators and command buttons that are used by the Ramp Soak RMPS instruction Ramp Soak Faceplate Help Commands Program Control Request 2 Operator Control Request Request Auto Mode Available g ia e P when in Operator Control P Control Initialize program and operator lt i to segment O values Available in Manual Mode Mode Indicators P Device in Program Mode 0 Device in Operator Mode 254 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Totalizer TOT The TOT instruction provides a time scaled accumulation of an analog input value Visualization Files The following files are required to use the Built In TOT Object and can be downloaded from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support pcdc page IMPORTANT Files must be imported in the following or
145. eady Approximation Approximation Factor 100 0 Factor 100 0 Noise Level Low Medium High Noise Level Low Medium High gus Tuning 0 00 Autotune 600 min J Tuning 0 00 Autotune 60 0 min Limit Timeout Limit Timeout Autotuned B Current Autotuned B Current Gain 0 0000 Bd 1 0000 Gain 0 0000 md 1 0000 Time Constant 0 0000 0 0000 sec Time Constant 0 0000 0 0000 sec Dead Time 0 0000 0 0000 sec Dead Time 0 0000 0 0000 Response 0 0000 Slow 0 0000 sec Response 0 0000 Slo 0 0000 Time Const Time Const 0 0000 Medium 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 PV2 Load Parameters Button PV 1 Load Parameters Button Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 229 Appendix F 230 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The following table lists the functions on of the MMC Autotune Operator tab Table 69 MMC Autotune Operator Tab Description Function Process Type Approximation Factor Noise Level PV Tuning Limit Autotune Timeout Currrent Gain Current Time Constant Currect Dead Time Current Response Time Constant Load Parameters Start Autotune Stop Autotune Security Click Integrating or Non inegrating to select the Process Type for PV1 and PV2 Configuration and Tuning Maintenance Code D Type a value for the non integrating approximation factor for PV1 or PV2 IMPORTANT You can enter this value only when the Process Type is Integrating Click to select an estimate of the noise
146. ece of equipment to Start s Group Permissive Fd Group Non Byp Perm Permissive conditions generally Bl Restart inhibited must be true to start the Bd Equipment Allocated equipment Once the Fd Local Permissives equipment is running permissives are ignored Add On Instruction P_Perm Permissives Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM007 aj Inp_PermOO Sts_Perm D Central Reset P_ Reset Reset Button The P_ Reset instruction provides a central point that E resets equipment faults and P latched alarms for a control ad Strategy Use this instruction if you want a common reset point Master Reset for alarms and fault Add On Instruction conditions for a control Strategy process unit process cell or equipment group P Reset eel process area or plant section or Bical even a small site Inp Reset Out Reset m el Ino ResetReqd Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM008 Common Alarm Block P_Alarm Alarm Display Bars Faceplate Reactor 1 Agitator Speed Control The P_ Alarm instruction is used to monitor an input condition and when it is true Vo Fault raise an alarm An operator is notified of abnormal conditions D Alar input Status or events Not Shelved This instruction handles Alarm Acknowledgement Alarm Reset Alarm Shelving ai S _ Disabling and Alarm Add On Instruction Suppression for FactoryTalk Not Suppressed
147. ed Fail High and Fail Low thresholds Thresholds are set in configuration Device failed to reach commanded state Loop failure PV bad SP bad or CV communication failure or bad Raised if the motor has and is using run feedback an attempt is made to start the motor and the run feedback does not indicate the motor running within the configured time Raised if the motor has and is using run feedback an attempt is made to stop the motor and the run feedback does not indicate the motor stopped within the configured time Raised if the Valve has and is using Open and or Closed feedback an attemptis made to open or close the valve and the valve position feedback indicates the valve did not move off its original position at all during the configured time PV above High threshold Threshold is set by Operator or Program Deadband gating timing and severity are set in configuration Library Objects Valve objects including e P_ValveC e P_ValveMO I 0 Processing objects including P_AlnMulti Valve objects including P_D4SD I 0 Processing objects including P_AlnDual Motor objects including e P_PF52x e P_PF753 e P_PF755 e P_VSD Additional objects including e P_DoseFM e P DoseWS I 0 Processing Valve and Regulatory Control objects including e P_AlChan P_Aln P_AlnAdv P_AlnDual P_AlnMulti e P_D4SD e P_ValveMP e P_PIDE Motor objects including P_ Motor P_Motor2Spd P_MotorRev P_PF52x
148. emoteTrip Val_PctTherm Val_Currlmbal Val_AvgPctFLA Val_AvgCurr Val_GndF aultCurr Val_AvgVolts Val_TotRealPwr Val_TotReactPwr Val_TotAppPwr Val_PwrFact Sts_MotorCurr Sts_GFCurr Sts_MotorVolts Sts_InpPtoo Sts_InpPt01 Sts_OutPt0d Sts_LocalResetReqd Sts_Err Sts_VWarn Sts_Trip Sts_lOF ault P AR C A C a K a C a C a S a C a C a C A O a T S A O B O A O B O A a O a O B C a Global Object Z Add On Instruction P_RunTime Run Time and Starts Val_Starts D Val_CurRunHrs D Val_MaxRunHrs D Val_TotRunHrs D Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 P_E3000vld Motor Overload Relay Thermal Utilization 14 00 Average Full Load Amps I Power Factor Motor Current Present Motor Voltage Present 95 50 Faceplate Accumulated Run Time Hours l IE N Current running time this start hours ae Maximum continuous running A time for a given start hours Be 10 07 Total accumulated running A5 time hours l 10 0 Total number of motor starts A or attempts Mee 10 0 P1_Motor_RunTime Overview Chapter 1 Table 6 Motors Process Object Description Object Elements E300 Overload Relay P_E3000vid The P_E3000vId instruction Global Object Faceplate 31 Chapter Overview Table 6 Motors Process Object Description Object Elements Restart Inhibit for Large Motor Global Object Faceplate P_ResInh Restart Inh
149. ence Manual PROCES RM004 Saturated Steam Temperature P_TSat The p_TSat instruction calculates the temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit of saturated steam given the absolute pressure in MPa or psia It also provides the liquid and vapor enthalpy entropy and specific volume at the given pressure Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM004 General Steam Table P_ Steam The P_ Steam instruction calculates the enthalpy entropy and specific volume for steam or water at the given pressure and temperature Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM004 Object Elements The P_ PSat instruction is a calculation function only and no HMI components are provided The P_TSat instruction is a calculation function only and no HMI components are provided The P_ Steam instruction is a calculation function only and no HMI components are provided Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Add On Instruction PPSat m Steam P Sat Given T g inp T Out Psat D ots InpErr E Add On Instruction P TSat ea steam T Sat Given F g inp P Out Tsat O sts InpErr E Add On Instruction F_ Steam x steam Properties Inp P Out Region Inp 7 Out Enthalpy Out Entropy Out volume sts_InpErr Table 8 Steam Table Steam Object Description Steam Properties Given Enthalpy and Entropy P_Steam_hs T
150. endObjUse Ref_MsgGetMemUse Ref_MsgGetOSTaskTimes Ref_MsgGetUserTaskTimes Ref_MsgGetConnUse Ref_WindowT Ref_TrendObjData Ref_MemUseData Ref_TaskTimeData Ref_ConnData eee eel 9 z3 S E ae ORO RC ROR CRO Sts_MsgErr Sts_WrongVersion Global Object Redundant Controller A Primary B Sync Add On Instruction L_Redun Redundant Controller Monitor Val_QualProgress p Val_Compat Val_XferSizeLast B Val_XferSizeMax Val_Sts Val_Fault 5 Sts_PriChassis 9 Sts_SyncBusy Sts_SyncDone A Sts_SyncErr 9 Sts_SwitchoverBusy 9 Sts_SwitchoverDone f Sts_SwitchoverErr Sts_Err Sts_SecNotRdy Ref_SyncMSG Ref_SwitchoverMSG Ref_SyncData Ref_SwitchoverData Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Add On Instruction L_ChangeDet Logix Change Detector q Cfg_UpdateT Val_Check E Cmd_AckAll Val_Year Val_Month Val_Day Val_Hour Val_Minut Sts_OnlineChange Sts_NoChangeDownload Sts_ChangeDownload Sts_EditsDownload Sts_RestoreFromFlash Sts_FaultMode Sts_RunMode Sts_ProgMode Sts_MinorRecovFlt Sts_MinorUnrecovF lt Sts_MajorRecovFlt Sts_MajorUnrecovFlt Sts_KeyswRun Sts_KeyswRem Sts_KeyswProg Sts_Timing Sts_Busy BURTON OeePeOeOeUMeeeUVUVUUOUDU Sts_Done Sts_MsgErr Ref_CLMsgCtrl Ref_CLMsgS Ref_CLMsgDest Ref_CSMsgCtrl rd Ref_CSMsgS Ref_CSMsgDest Ref_DTMsgCtrl Ref_DTMsgSrc Ref_DTMsgDest Fa Faceplate Pro
151. enu choose Import FactoryTalk View tag CSV files and click Next Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 77 Chapter2 How to Install the Library The Tag Import and Export Wizard dialog box reappears with a blank Project text box Tag Import and Export Wizard x Choose the FactoryTalk wiew project you want ta import into Destination projects Project Type Machine Edition Project ext Cancel Help 3 From the Project text box click Browse and select the med project file that you want the HMI tags imported into and click Open The Tag Import and Export Wizard dialog box reappears with the med file in the Project text box Tag Import and Export Wizard Choose the FactoryTalk view project you want to import into Destination projects Project Type Machine Edition s Project CiUsers PubliciDocumentsiRSview Enterprise MEVHMI projects MEO Samples Seq 3008 METO_ Samples Seq 3008 med 4 Click Next Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 How to Install the Library Chapter 2 The Tag Import and Export Wizard dialog box reappears with a blank Import Files text box Tag Import and Export Wizard p x Choose the FactoryTalk view CS Files you want to import Import files M Tags ext gt Cancel Help 5 From the Import files text box click Browse and select the csv file that is contained within the
152. es All png files in the images folder All png files in the images folder These are the common icons used in the global objects and faceplates for all Process Objects HMI Tags FTVME_PlantPAxLib_Tags_3_1_00 sy These tags must be imported into the FactoryTalk View ME project to support switching tabs on any Process Object faceplate 1 The service release number boldfaced can change as service revisions are created Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 201 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions IMiC Oi Ifi E intemal hiodel Coa nirol Pro JL amp RA eq E Fro gAutoReg m FrogtanualReg Prag Qwertide Reg z Fra gHan dFe q 202 Display Elements A display element global object is created once and can be referenced multiple times on multiple displays in an application When changes are made to the original base object the instantiated copies reference objects are automatically updated Use of global objects in conjunction with tag structures in the ControlLogix system aid consistency and save engineering time play Elements Descriptions Display Element Description Alr Clr Alr 11 87 deg Bx Internal Model Control object with a Process Variable and a Control Variable Ih 12 17 deg Bx BJ 0 00 Mm Internal Model Control object with a Process Variable Inc Setpoint and a Control Variable SP 33 00 deg Bx Clr 0 00
153. es Mo Cancel IMPORTANT __ FactoryTalk ME software deletes all current alarms in the ME alarm server tag database when importing an XML file To keep existing ME alarms you must export the alarms to an XML file and then append to that XML file If append is clicked in the message box the Alarms Builder tool overwrites any existing tag information in the XML file with the Alarms Builder tool configured parameter settings 5 Click Yes to overwrite No to append or Cancel to abort the alarm export 6 Click OK to export the tags to the ME alarms XML import file Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 155 Appendix B 156 Alarms Builder Tool 5 Save XML Import File This section describes how to use FactoryTalk View Studio software to implement the XML file to import alarms into the PlantPAx system Follow these steps after opening the FactoryTalk View Studio software 1 From the FactoryIalk View Studio Explorer tree configuration right click the AE alarm server and choose Import and Export amp RSView Studio Machine Edition Explorer ME_Process B 49 Local FREDSERVER fos ME_Process 2 fB ME_Process BG System 4 HMI Tags i AA Graphics B S Alarms H E Infomation H E Logic and Cont Import and Export H E Data Log _ H E RecipePlus a amp RSLinx Enterprise 2 System H E Policies ws Networks and Devices 9 Users and Groups The Alarm Import Expor
154. es eld ese ase teens Mea ea et A ee Ss eee 227 PUES AD lt ou gedit aaa anes a ok ems 228 Paceplate PIED ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 228 Modular Multivariable Control MMC Autotune 229 MMC Autotune Alarms Tab oo eee cece eee ee eee 231 MMC Autotune Faceplate Help siaiccuenteviwiorsieagentens 231 Proportional Integral Derivative Enhanced PIDE 232 VW iSUAlIZatiON File 42 vec iranian binata we le OET ERARA 232 Diphy Ekmen errue te aT EE S 233 Operator TaD siisricikaiea teere a i 235 Maintenance Pabicies ci ctw ndccondesedudebecaes Seb iwehes dees 236 Engineering Lab tc ndanbiedasteaennsacin SU shade wasswaeencas e 241 Prends TiD aeien au telve a cnt E ee as ee eee 244 Trends TaD Pape Zoeren Roa a a A ba 245 Alam TaD eadra aE E N A E EAA 246 Faceplate HelDorisnurer einan he pee aea aaa aed 247 Ramp Soak RMPS ecxc ccbag eteotendthataaetaces AEA 248 Vistialization Piles eceran a e EE AEE EAA 248 Display Element pse tive watense aE E AAE 249 Operator TaD ae reed pr en E EE EN E E EEA 249 Maintenance Tabi rerescrini rien ni ee enn A ees Sa ke 251 Engineering LAD iG what tdi sise rE E ATE tenes 252 Trends Tabasisasisecscca tinake ENT a a a hia 253 Faceplate Mele ereraa do EE 254 Todalen T ON ean aa e A AEN OES 255 Visualization PileSii sawehekcdian dn beedeukveddscealiauia seies 255 Display let entsit cite er ee a e EE 256 Maintenance MaDe dacasu cote sie kth aacnciotwsiae ene 259 Eneincerine Labrisniiasovhsc
155. es for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Trends Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the PIDE Trends tab shows the waveforms for the output CV 100 00 75 00 50 00 25 00 0 00 RREN ea Ga Ce Ca mm Cel el Len Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 245 Appendix F 246 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Alarms Tab The PIDE Alarms tab shows all the available alarms for the device and their current status Built In PIDE fn oO 3 PY High High Alarm SP Low Alarm PY High Alarm PY Positive ROC Alarm PY Low Alarm PY Negative ROC Alarm PY Low Low Alarm CY High Alarm Deviation High High Alarm CY Low Alarm Deviation High Alarm CY ROC Alarm Deviation Low Alarm Ratio High Alarm Deviation Low Low Alarm Ratio Low Alarm Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplate Help Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The Help faceplate shows the indicators and command buttons There are two Help pages Faceplate Help Page 1 PIDE Faceplate Help Bi Status Indicators bq Invalid Configuration A Auto Loop Mode A Auto Loop Mode cascade enabled a The CY has reached a high limit and cannot control the loop Level Indicators A High Level Exceeded High High Level Exceeded Deviation Indicators A High Deviation Exceeded High High Deviation Exceeded Mode Indicators P Device in Program Mode r Override x Communica
156. f Logix Diagnostic Objects publication PROCES RM003 Rockwell Automation Library of Steam Table Instructions publication PROCES RM004 FactoryTalk Alarms and Events System Configuration Guide publication FIAE RMO001 Logix5000 Controllers Add On Instructions Programming Manual publication 1756 PM010 Description Provides information to assist with equipment procurement for your PlantPAx system Provides characterized recommendations for implementing your PlantPAx system Explains procedures for configuring pre built controller and HMI templates for a basic framework of the PlantPAx system Provides details on how to use this software package for developing and running human machine interface HMI applications that can involve multiple users and servers distributed over a network Provides details on how to use this software package for creating an automation application Provides Add On Instructions for monitoring and diagnostic information of Logix controllers These Add On Instructions are an extension of the Library of Process Instructions to provide steam table calculations Provides details on how to install configure and use FactoryTalk Alarms and Events services as part of a FactoryTalk enabled automation system Provides information for designing configuring and programming Add On Instructions You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper
157. ferenced LINT unmodified if the Enableln condition is false If the given bit number is outside the range 0 63 the controller major faults on an invalid array index bad bit number There is no validity checking of the given bit number This instruction unlatches the given Bit of the referenced LINT 64 bit integer tag that is it clears the given bit false 0 if the Enableln condition is true or leaves the given bit and the referenced LINT unmodified if the Enableln condition is false If the given Bit number is outside the range 0 63 the controller major faults on an invalid array index bad bit number There is no validity checking of the given bit number This instruction returns Input A if the input selector bit is false Input B if the selector bit is true IMPORTANT When Enableln is false the input selector bit sense is reversed With the selector bit default value of 1 this lets the rung state in an LD instance to control the selector in a straightforward manner If the rung is true select Inp_B if the rung is false select Inp_A Subtracts two LINT signed 64 bit values and returns a LINT signed 64 bit difference Also provides math status bits for Carry borrow Negative Overflow and Zero result equivalent to built in S C S N S V Z This instruction examines the given Bit of the input LINT 64 bit integer and outputs true 1 if the bit is 1 false 0 if the bit is 0 IMPORTANT Use the
158. for a complete listing of the library objects 12 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Table 1 describes additional Rockwell Automation libraries that the PlantPAx system leverages for process specific content Table 1 Rockwell Automation Library Resources Resource Description Provides Add On Instructions that monitor controllers to provide diagnostic information Rockwell Automation Library of Logic Diagnostic Objects publication PROCES RM003 Provides Add On Instructions for steam table calculations Rockwell Automation Library of Steam Table Instructions publication PROCES RM004 Provides instructions for a controller based step sequencing solution that reduces engineering time by automating common operator procedures Rockwell Automation Sequencer Object publication PROCES RM006 Provides instructions for using a generic mechanism to interact with the operator for any task Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects Operator Prompt publication SYSLIB RM046 Using Library Object Documentation Each Library object has its own reference manual that defines the parameters and display elements that are specific to the object The manuals are structured with the following sub sections bookmarks in the PDFs as shown in Figure 2 Figure 2 Add On Instruction Bookmarks ELF Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects Multiple Analog Input P_AlInMulti
159. gineers and others to interact with instrument data Do these steps to import faceplates 1 Right click Displays and choose Add Component Into Application Sad Graphics a USES The Add Component Into Project dialog box appears 2 Browse to your downloaded Rockwell Automation library files 3 Click the graphics folder 4 Click the FactoryTalk View SE or FactoryTalk View ME folders depending on your application 5 Click the GFX folder Z Add Component Into Project _ G gt Files Process Objects Library Graphics FTView SE GFX Organize v a Network and Ir fal Programs a System and Sec ESA User Accounts Z Recycle Bin Files Graphics for Bu Logix Diagnost Other Add On Premier Integre Process Object Graphics FTView ME D FTview SE Color Ch D GFX Global Ot Filename RA BAS P_Aln Quick gfx RA BAS P_Aln Faceplate gfx RA BAS P_AIn Help gfx Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 New folder a Hil Name f Date modified Type Size w _ RA BAS Common AnalogEdit gf 6 28 2013 8 00 AM GFX File 107 KB z RA BAS P_AlChan Faceplate gfx 1 21 2014 10 00 AM GFX File 301 KB RA BAS P_AlChan Help gfx 10 29 2013 1 00PM GFX File 58 KB _ RA BAS P_AlInAdv Faceplate gfx 1 21 2014 10 00 AM GFX File 422 KB __ RA BAS P_AlnAdyv Help gfx 6 28 2013 8 00AM GFX File 81 KB _ RA BAS P_AlnAdv Quick
160. gral gain tuned slow medium or fast e Derivative gain tuned slow medium or fast e Time constant e Dead time e Gain Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 183 Appendix F 184 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Autotune Built In PIDE QA iif Tag Ready Ready pt ia Process Type Temperature Level Integrating Pressure Position Mon Integrating Flow Velocity Other CY Step Size 0 0 0 PW Change Limit 0 00 Proportional Integral Derivative T Minutes Minutes Slow o oo o ooo0 0 0000 eer Medium 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 i Dead Time Ea 0 00 Fast 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Gain 1 00000 Current 0 5000 2 9000 0 0000 The following table lists the functions on the Autotune Operator tab Table 42 Autotune Operator Tab Description Click to release the Autotune tag Configuration and Tuning Maintenance Code D Click to acquire the Autotune tag Click to start the autotune process for CV1 CV2 or CV3 Click to stop the autotune process Configuration and Tuning Maintenance Code D Click to replace the current model parameters with the calculated Autotune model parameters Process Type Click the item that best describes the process CV Step Size Type a value for CV step size in percent for the tuning step test PC Change Limit Type a value for the PV Change Limit The autotune is aborted if the PV changes by more than this amount Gains Type i
161. h Main R rach D ees Paste Ctrl V Task_D_500ms E a Task D Ma Delete Del Task Els Verify b Task_F_2 i S raa Ea Cross Reference Ctrl E i amp Task_G_5s Browse Logic Ctrl L iW Task GMa i B Task_H_10s Accept Pending Program Edits i i ex Task H Ma Cancel Dendina Dranram Felite The New Routine dialog box appears New Routine Name OK Description Cancel Type Function Block Diagram in oem g Task_G_MainProgram Assignment lt none gt E Open Routine 2 Type a name for the routine 3 Click the Type pull down to select a Logic language such as Function Block Diagram and click OK 4 Double click the routine name in the Controller Organizer A blank sheet appears in the right pane Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 69 Chapter2 How to Install the Library 5 Right click the blank sheet and choose Add Element ae on amp Sheet 1 wv of Controller Organizer xX Pf H E Task A_MainProgram b Task_B_100ms 4 Task_B_MainProgram a Task_C_250ms l 6 83 Task_C_MainPrograrr Program Tags m EE Main_Routine 5 3 Task_D_500ms iy Task_D_MainPrograrr R Task E 1s Original View Ctrl 1 Pending Edits View Ctrl 2 GB Task_F_2s Test Edits View Ctrl 3 cx i Task_F_MainProgram 5 Task G 5s Go To Ctrl G 5 33 Task_G_MainPrograrr p 1 Next Sheet Shift Page Down i Program Tags
162. has a revision xx yy zz where xx is the Major Revision number yy is the Minor Revision number and zz is the service release Each release of the Library comes with release notes describing the changes made since the last release Component Example The Add On Instruction in RSLogix 5000 software has revision information visible when the instruction is E G P_AlnDual selected in the Controller Organizer i Eee AlnMuli pamm ce P_ Aut a Description Multiple to 3 Analog Input v3 0 00 Release Initial Relese Part of PlantP4x Library 3 0 Vendor Rockwell Automation The faceplate in FactoryTalk View software has revision information visible when the pointer is paused just inside C 49 11 the lower left corner of the faceplate when accessed in a running HMI Client D 49 94 Process Library P_4InMulti Faceplate version 5 0 00 Release RA BAS P_AInMulti Faceplate gfx The instruction and faceplate are compatible if they have the same Major and Minor Revision numbers In general service releases can be loaded into your application with little impact although we suggest that you review the release notes to make sure you understand the changes made in the release and assess the impact to your application Using two different Major Minor revisions of the Library in a single application is not supported When updating major or minor releases there are several considerations to take into account e The new revi
163. he CY has reached a lovy limit and cannot control the loop and cannot control the loop Level Indicators a High Level Exceeded we Lov Level Exceeded Mode Indicators P Device in Program Mode O Device in Operator Mode r Override H Hand Local Commands Program Control Request jel Operator Control Request Control amp Cascade fatio Enabled M Request Manual Loop Mode p Available when in Operator Control Control C Request Cascade Loop Mode A Request Auto Loop Mode T Available when in Operator i Available when in Operator Internal Model Control IMC Autotune The faceplates in this section let you access all of the necessary parameters to autotune the IMC function block as well as hand tune the instruction IMC Autotune Operator Tab The IMC Autotune Operator tab shows the following information e Approximation factor e Autotuned gain Time constant and dead time e Calculated value of CV time constant for slow response medium response and fast response speeds e Load selected parameters into CC configuration parameters button e Start CV autotune button e Stop CV autotune button Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Autotune deg Bx ai tn Process Type Non Integrating Ready pl a Integrating Approx 100 0 lt Factor Approximation Factor Noise Level Low Medium High
164. he P_Steam_hs Steam Properties Given Enthalpy and Entropy Add On Instruction calculates the pressure temperature specific volume Region 3 and vapor fraction Region 4 at the given enthalpy and entropy Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM004 Steam Properties Given Pressure and Enthalpy P_Steam_ph The P_Steam_ph Steam Properties Given Pressure and Enthalpy Add On Instruction calculates the temperature and specific volume Region 3 at the given pressure and enthalpy Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM004 Steam Properties Given Pressure and Entropy P_Steam_ps The P_Steam_ps Steam Properties Given Pressure and Entropy Add On Instruction calculates the temperature and specific volume Region 3 at the given pressure and entropy Click the link to access the Reference Manual PROCES RM004 Object Elements The P_Steam_hs instruction is a calculation function only and no HMI components are provided The P_Steam_ph instruction is a calculation function only and no HMI components are provided The P_Steam_ps instruction is a calculation function only and no HMI components are provided Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Add On Instruction P_Steam_hs Steam Properties h s g Inp_s Out_Region D Out_Temperature A Out_Pressure A Out_Volume A Sts_InpErr E Sts_OutErr E Add On
165. he faceplate initially opens to the Operator Home tab From here an operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator mode Operator Mode Command Button Program Mode Command Button Built In PIDE Current Mode Indicator Requested Modes Indicator ___ 0 Current Loop Mode Indicator Manual 100 00 Auto Loop Mode 60 00 Command Button 000 P PV Slider Current SP Value PY 0 82 Current PV Value IBL Current Ratio Value 1 00 Cascade Loop Mode o C 1 00 0 Command Button 100 P Current CV Value p Nana Loop Made po M es aa a Command Button Eei ooo 1 100 L 0 00 0 00 R H 100 00 CV Slider E 0 00 Input Status Indicator p The following table lists the functions on of the CC Operator tab Table 72 PIDE Operator Tab Description Click to request Operator mode Manual Device Operation Code B Click to request Program mode Click to go to Manual Loop mode Normal Operation of Devices Code A Click to go to Cascade Loop mode Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 235 Appendix F 236 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Table 72 PIDE Operator Tab Description i Click to go to Auto Loop mode Normal Operation of Devices Code A Operator Setpoint Type a value for the loop Setpoint Value Operator Ratio Type a value for
166. he functions of page 3 of the Maintenance tab Table 75 PIDE Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description Operator CV Value Type a value for CV when in the Operator Manual mode Normal Operation CVOper of Devices Code A Override Value Type a value for CV when in the Override Configurationand CVOverride Maintenance CV High and Low Type values for the CV high and low limits Code D e CVHLimit Limits e CVLLimit CV Rate of Change Type a value for CV in percent per second CVROCLimit Limit CV EU Minimum Type values for the maximum and Engineering e CVEUMax and Maximum minimum values for CVEU Configuration CVEUMin Code E Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 239 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Maintenance Tab Page 4 Page 4 of the PIDE Maintenance tab has Operator inputs for PVs deviations and Range of Change limits and period Built In PIDE q 3 a Threshold Deadband P High High 3 40E38 P High 3 40E385 0 00 PY Low 3 40 E38 PY LowLow 3 40E38 High High Deviation 3 40636 High Deviation 3 40636 0 00 Low Deviation 3 40E38 Low Low Deviation 3 40E38 P Pos ROC Limit 0 00 P Meg ROC Limit 0 00 P ROC Period 0 00 The following table shows the functions of page 4 of the Maintenance tab Table 76 PIDE Maintenance Tab Page 4 Description Function PV High High PV High PV Low PV Low Low PV Deadband High High Deviation
167. he link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM029 Overview Chapter 1 Object Elements Global Object 50 06 degC M Add On Instruction Faceplate Multiple to 8 Analog Input a ye A eln M 0 a e P_AlnMulti as Multiple to 8 Analog Input 100 E m 73 eroded VYal_HiHiLim D Substitute z 49 48 L 40 Val_HiLim pD Yal_LoLim D o m_ te 15 Val_LoLoLim D deg C Sts_P VAReject S A 49 62 Sts_PVBReject a Sts_PVCReject a B 49 00 Sts_P VDReject Sts_PVEReject C 49 16 Sts_PWF Reject D 50 13 Sts_PYGReject Sts_PVHReject Sts_Err P_AlnMulti Global Object Faceplate Pi Motor Power tr be A P from Input Substitute PV Failed Add On Instruction P_Din zaj Discrete Input Inp PY Normal ots E sts PY H ots Err E inp Target E Ino Gate Global Object Discrete On Off Device Faceplate 7 j YA a ih ela M o a Ey x or D off Feedback off Add On Instruction a P_DOut A Discrete Output or ale U Inp_OnFdbk Inp_OffF dbk Inp_PermOK y m Inp_NBPermOK Inp_IntIkOK Inp_NBIntIkOK P_DOut Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 17 Chapter1 Overview Table 3 1 0 Processing Process Object Description Object Elements Analog Output P_AOut Global Object Faceplate Th p AO t ii d Analog Output e ut i
168. hes clear failures bind bind ack Y ab 2 gt 0b QO O E tw fab Q O E O Z A X X X Acquire Release Equipment Maintenance Mode Reset Run Time Accumulators Override Inputs Bypass Feedback Enable Disable Device Configuration Limits Constants Timers Modify Alarm Delay Times Tuning Change Machine Configuration Setup Configuration Advanced Alarm Configuration Put Device in Simulation Edit HMI Application Acknowledge Alarms Reset Alarms Shelve Alarms Disable Alarms Modify Alarm Limits and Deadbands Bypass Permissives and Interlocks Respond to Prompt level 1 Respond to Prompt level 2 Exception Processing Resume Manual Auto Semi Auto Pause Disconnect Release Exception Processing Step Change Parameter Change Step Acquire Reorder Reactivate Step Override Downloaded Setpoints Override Downloaded Phase Parameters Manual Batch Processing Stop Abort Reset Phases Manual Supervisory EP EM Control Force Steps States Change Inflights and Preacts Force Queue Indexing Navigate to Other Units Shutdown HMI Application Access Windows Start Menu Windows Apps Change Accounts Passwords Change Security Settings HMI Operators HMI Operating Supervisor HMI Maintenance HMI Maintenance Supervisor HMI Manager HMI Engineering HMI Admin XxX KK KK X
169. ial system commissioning or later system changes The Engineering tab is divided into two pages Engineering Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the MMC Engineering tab has various Operator inputs options for the CV Cascade Ratio mode and Windup CV Limit C in Manual Mode Model Gain units Place instruction in Manual mode while EY C nitializing is set Reset Program Inputs after each execution Drive to Target cvi CV2 CV3 Target Response Time Constant 0 000 P1 Deviation P 2 Deviation Action Priority Action Priority CV CV2 CV3 Cv CV2 CV3 First a Second ih i Third amp 224 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F The following table shows the functions of page 1 of the MMC Engineering tab Table 67 MMC Engineering Tab Page 1 Description Function Limit CV in manual Mode Place instruction in Manual mode while CVInitializing is set Reset Program Inputs after each execution Model Gain units Drive to Target V1 V2 V3 Target Response Time Constant PV1 Deviation Action Priority First CV1 CV2 or V3 Second CV1 CV2 or CV3 Third CV1 CV2 or V3 PV2 Deviation Action Priority First CV1 CV2 or V3 Second CV1 CV2 or V3 Third CV1 CV2 or V3 Limit CV1 CV2 or CV3 in Manual mode If in Manual mode and CVManLimiting is true CV1 CV2 and CV3 are limited by the CV1 CV2 and
170. ibit A Ready to Start x The P_ResInh instruction is x 3600 Hot Ready to Start used to prevent damage to a large motor through repeated starts The instruction provides a rule based state model for restarts and is not intended to model or monitor the motor Add On Instruction poen heating Wait 1800 sec P_ResInh Cold Subsequent Fail Restart Inhibit Oo Inp_Stopped Click the link to access the a inp Running ae Running Cool al sec Reference Manual SYSLIB RM009 32 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Notes Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 33 Chapter1 Overview Valves The Process Objects in this group provide an interface to a wide range of process valve types as well as valve statistical calculations Table 7 Valves Process Object Description Object Elements Analog Pulsed Control Valve Global Object Faceplate P_ValveC Pulse Output alve yA fella Home Operator ator 3 a Bes The P_ValveC instruction manipulates a control valve by using an analog signal or discrete signals The valve requires an analog output or analog value over a Controlled Variable 60 00 60 00 network for the target ON ms position or the valve requires a g me Fosr dr hg es pair of discrete outputs or inp_ClosedLS Out Close P Y discrete signals over a network aoe Pcie Ue ai ais ae Rag to tell i
171. iew Chapter 1 Table 28 Motor and Drive Buttons m l Run Motor Forward Run Motor Reverse Run Motor at Slow Speed Operator Command to Trip Motor Request Reverse Motion Restart Inhibit Navigation Button Runtime Accumulator Navigation Button Overload Navigation Button Se a ie m Ly ly lv Table 29 Valve Buttons Open Valve ba Close Valve Stop Valve Motion Operator Command to Trip Valve Bump Valve Close Dy Bump Valve Open Valve Stats Navigation Button 4 m K Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 57 Chapter1 Overview Table 30 Overload Buttons Button Description Description Operator Command to Trip Overload Operator Command to Reset the LJ Overload Trip Table 31 Digital Output Buttons Output ON Output OFF Pulse Output ON Once Pulse Output OFF Once Continuous Pulse Output SSS Table 32 Analog Input Buttons Use Input PV D Use Substitute PV Select Sensor A Input PV Select Sensor B Input PV Select the Maximum of Sensor A and Sensor B Input PV 2 Select the Minimum of Sensor A and Operator Command to Reset Min and Sensor B Input PV Max capture Values Select the Average of Sensor A and Sensor B Input PV 58 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Table 33 Dosing Buttons Clear Totalizer pme Tar Scale Start Totalizer
172. igh Level Exceeded we Low Level Exceeded Commands M Request Manual Loop Mode A Request Auto Loop Mode p Available when in Operator e Available when in Operator Program Control Request 2 Operator Control Request Control Control Coordinated Control CC Autotune The faceplates in this section let you access all of the necessary parameters to autotune the CC function block as well as hand tune the instruction CC Autotune Operator Tab The CC Autotune Operator tab shows the following information Approximation factor Autotuned gain time constant and dead time Calculated value of CV time constant for slow response medium response and fast response speeds Load selected parameters into CC configuration parameters button Start CV autotune button Stop CV autotune button Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 197 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Approximation Factor Autotune Values 198 Process Type p Approximation Fattar Noise Level P Tuning Limit Gain Time Constant Dead Time Response Time Const Autotune C 1 for CC i Mo J D Integrating Non Integrating CV1 Step Size 10 0000 m Cv1 Ready 100 0 Low Medium High Autotune m 0 00 Tiad 60 0 min Autotuned Current 0 0000 jisi 1 0000 0 0000 0 0000 sec 0 0000 0 0000 sec 0 0000 Slow 0 0000 sec 0 0000 Medium 0 0000 Fast Load Parameters Butto
173. ilable for FT View V6 or higher Logix Severity AE Severity 1 1 251 251 501 501 751 Reset Severities to PlantPAx Defaults The top half of the dialog box lists the Logix tags that are configured with AE alarm definitions and synchronization data type elements The bottom half of the dialog box lets you choose synchronize tab options 8 Click one of the tabs in the bottom half of the dialog box based on the parameters that you want to synchronize Sync Severity is the tab selected in our example The mapping values are set based on the Logix and AE tags severity See Table 38 on page 131 for mapping values IMPORTANT The AE tag is added to the XML import file if the Logix tag s HasAlarm value is set to 1 For example if a P_Aln tag is configured with a Cfg_HasHiHiAlm equal to 1 and Cfg_HasHiAlm equal to 0 the Alarms Builder tool adds a HiHi alarm AE tag to the XML import file and does not add a Hi alarm AE tag The Sync AckRequired tab is not a configurable option All of these parameters for AE tags are configured as true per the Rockwell Automation Process Library alarm configuration guidelines Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 141 Appendix B 142 Alarms Builder Tool String local tags for storing Add On Instructions labels and descriptions can be used in the AE alarm messages created by the Alarms Builder tool 9 Click Sync 10 Click OK to comp
174. in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 IMPORTANT This instruction is dependent on the user defined type DateTime external to this Add On Instruction definition DateTime is defined as the following Yr DINT year Mo DINT month Da DINT day Hr DINT hour Min DINT minute Sec DINT second uSec DINT microsecond T_Now Current DateTime Returns the current local date and time from the controller clock as a DateTime T_Now_1_0 00_AOI L5X In Out Parameter This instruction depends on the external DateTime data type Yr DINT year e Mo DINT month e Da DINT day e Hr DINT hour e Min DINT minute Sec DINT second e uSec DINT microsecond T_ Scan Time Since Previous Scan Returns the time between the previous scan of the instance and the current scan of the T_Scan_1_0 01_AOI L5X same instance as a REAL number of Seconds T_ SEL DateTime Select This instruction uses an Input bit signal to select one of two Date Time values T_SEL_1_0 00_AOI L5X IMPORTANT The selected Date Time is only moved through as is it is not normalized to a valid Gregorian Date and Time Inp_Sel is defaulted to 1 so this instruction can be used on a Ladder Diagram Routine rung with the rung condition as the selector Rung True selects DT1 Rung False selects DTO The Inp_Sel is inverted when Enableln is False false rung This inversion can be usef
175. in LD or in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 L_ MEQ Masked Equal 64 bit Performs a 64 bit bitwise comparison of a Source Value against a Compare Value and L_MEQ_1_0 01_AOI L5X returns true if they are the same in all bit positions that have a 1 in the Mask Value Therefore output is true if Source AND Mask Compare and Mask On a False rung in LD or in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 L_MUL Multiply 64 bit X 32 bit This instruction implements an elementary school multiply and add partial products L_MUL_1_0 01_AOI L5X place notation method of multiplying a 64 bit integer LINT by a 32 bit integer DINT The resulting product is a 64 bit integer LINT L_ MVM Move with Mask 64 bit Performs a 64 bit bitwise Move with Mask of a Source Value to an Output If a bit in the L_MVM_1_0 00_AOI L5X Mask is true the corresponding Source bit is copied to the Output If a bit in the Mask is false the corresponding Output bit is left unchanged In other words Output Output AND NOT Mask OR Source and Mask L_NEG Negate 64 bit This instruction returns the negative 2 s complement of an input 64 bit integer L_NEG_ 1 0 00 AOI L5X LINT value L_NEQ Not Equal 64 bit This instruction compares two LINT 64 bit signed integer variables L_NEQ 1 0 01 AOI L5X If Inp_A is not equal to Inp_B EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 L_N
176. ingle precision floating point number REAL to the L_FtoH_1_0 00_AOI L5X best equivalent 16 bit half precision floating point number stored in an INT because Logix does not have a SREAL type It accounts for positive and negative zero subnormal very small numbers Infinity 1 Indeterminate 1 IND and Not a Number 1 QNaN L_GEQ Greater Than or Equal 64 bit This instruction compares two LINT 64 bit signed integer variables L_GEQ_1_0 01_AOI L5X If Inp_A is greater than or equal to Inp_B EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 L_GRT Greater Than 64 bit This instruction compares two LINT 64 bit signed integer variables L_GRT_1_0 01_AOI L5X If Inp_A is greater than Inp_B EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 165 AppendixD Additional Add On Instructions Table 39 Long Integer Instructions Name Short Description Long Description File Name L_HtoF Half Precision to Float This instruction converts a 16 bit half precision floating point number contained in L_HtoF_1_0 00_AOI L5X an INT as Logix doesn t have an SREAL type to the equivalent 32 bit single precision floating point number REAL It accounts for positive and negative zero subnormal very small numbers Infinity 1 Indeterminate 1 IND and No
177. ink to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM040 SMC 50 Smart Motor Controller Global Object P_SMC50 topped The P_SMC50 instruction controls and monitors a motor via an SMC 50 Smart Motor Controller soft starter The instruction communicates with the motor controller to Start stop and jog the motor The instruction also monitors the status of the motor detects motor failure to start or stop P_SMcs0O SMC 50 Smart Motor Controller and displays motor runtime donee ad naam kame information inp intkOK Val TiigTimesec D The runtime data includes a iage val amesa power power factor motor d e ovaca sts stopped D thermal usage time to trip iiaii Sie Punai D time until reset and motor Eme controller fault codes B This instruction is provided as a Sis Hand p rung import for installation Sts_Prog f Sts_Oper Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM052 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplate PowerFlex 755 Drive Demo 7M A OJE drator a Fy 4 sa gt m gt eee oe Feedback Hz 000 Forward Reference Hz 30 00 30 00 Output Current Amps 0 00 Output Power KV 0 00 gt Torque Current Amps 0 00 Drive Ready Faceplate P_SMC50 SMC 50 Smart Motor Controller p AE a A OE Home Operator M Maintenance al les gt M 0 lt s gt E gt lead Motor Ready Motor Thermal Usage 0
178. intenance personnel can disable alarms and the P_Alarm Add On Instruction prevents new alarms from being generated when shelved The shelved or disabled status is reflected on the FactoryIalk View SE Alarm Status Explorer The examples use the following attributes e Path is Mix e Object is P50_Motor e Alarm is FailToStart Create a New Alarm Trigger Complete these steps 1 Open the FactoryTalk View Studio software 2 In the Explorer window click Alarms and double click Alarm Setup i Alarms r nE Alam Setup i ritrarre shine Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 The Alarm Setup dialog box appears with the Triggers tag open A Alarm Setup METO_Samples_Lib_300t o eae EASE Select trigger Trigger settings Trigger by pe Trigger label Value F Use ack all value 0 Optional trigger connections ck 3 Click Add The Trigger dialog box appears x Trigger f a cot 4 Click Browse under Tag The Tag Browser appears Tag Browser xs Select Tag Folders Contents of Mix Online P50_Motor Sam Online Name Access Rights Description B CAF_117 Ack FailToStart ReadWrite H E Hv Ack_FailToStop ReadWrite H E L_Redun Ack IntlkTrip ReadWrite amp Ack OFault ReadWrite ies ReadWrite Alm_FailToStop Read Write Alm_IntlkTrip Read Write
179. inter attached to the HMI terminal directly or via a network and you want the alarm to print when the alarm occurs We recommend that you leave the box blank Select the colors that are used to display the alarm on the alarm summary Colors selected must match the alarm severity Severity Foreground Background 1 250 Low White Blue 251 500 Medium Black Bright Yellow 501 750 High Black Bright Red 751 1000 Urgent Black Bright Magenta 3 Repeat these steps for additional messages 4 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 Secu rity Configuration Runtime security must be set up to provide each account or user group with the correct FactoryTalk View security codes The security codes verify that operators maintenance personnel and engineers have permission to run secured commands open secured graphic displays or write to secured HMI tags at runtime IMPORTANT See Appendix E for a list of security codes and descriptions FactoryIalk Directory stores information about which users have access to the parts of a control system During the log on FactoryTalk Security uses this information to verify the user s identity and then permissions assigned to the user Authorized users can then access secured parts of the application IMPORTANT FactoryTalk Security settings are stored separately for a Local Directory and a Network Directory
180. ion Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Trends Tab The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time These faceplate trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement but not replace dedicated historical or live trend displays The Trends tab is divided into two pages Trends Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the PIDE Trends tab shows the Input waveform ALa oe 2 M8 input Fate Onoins Day Input Rate Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 261 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Trends Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the Trends tab shows the quantity delivered Totalizer yea 63 4 2 m Quantity Delivered Onions Toona 1000 00 666 67 Quantity Delivered p IG ae 0 46 07 AM 10 46 07 A a La La LL Le Lee Ll Faceplate Help The faceplate Help page shows the indicators and command buttons that are used by the Totalizer Totalizer Faceplate Help Commands Program Control Request 2 Operator Control Request i Start Totalizer Request Stop Totalizer Request Available when in Operator aD Available when in Operator Contral Contral Totalizer Reset Request 0 0 80 Available when in Operator Control Mode Indicators P Device in Program Mode O Device in Operator Mode 262 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C
181. ion files that provide a common user interface You must import these files in the following order e Images png files e Global objects ggfx file type e HMI faceplates gfx file type A global object is an HMI display element that is created once and referenced multiple times on multiple displays in an application When changes are made to the original base object the instantiated copies reference objects are automatically updated Use of global objects in conjunction with tag structures in the ControlLogix system aid in consistency and save engineering time IMPORTANT Ifyou are using FactoryTalk View ME software you also must import the HMI tags to support switching tabs on any Process Object faceplate See Factorylalk View ME Configuration on page 77 for procedures The import procedures in this section are to be followed in the exact order as documented to add the visualization files to your project Import Images Do these steps to use the common icons for the global objects and faceplates for all Process objects 1 In your FactoryTalk View SE or ME software program depending on which one you are using click the to open the Graphics folder 4 Graphics Displays Global Objects T Symbol Factory rj Libraries fae a Parn Add Component Into Application 2 Right click Images and choose Add Component Into Application The Add Component Into Project dialog box appears 3 Bro
182. ion takes the given date and formats it as a human readable STRING T_TtoS_1_0 00_AOI L5X For example for the Date Time 2008 12 31 23 59 59 999999 the return STRING is based on configuration Wednesday December 31 2008 11 59 59 999999 p m Options are provided for e 24 or 12 hour time format with a m or p m indicator on the 12 hour format Displaying or not displaying microseconds Displaying or not displaying seconds Displaying or not displaying the Day of the Week Displaying day first 31 July or month first July 31 Displaying date in an ISO format YYYY MM DD This instruction checks for a valid Gregorian date and time and returns Invalid Date and or Invalid Time as appropriate in the output STRING The following are valid dates times e 0 lt Microseconds lt 1 000 000 e 0 lt Seconds lt 60 0 lt Minutes lt 60 0 lt Hours lt 24 0 lt Days lt 31 and a valid Gregorian Date Feb 28 or 29 days 1 lt Month lt 12 Year in the range 5879600 The names of the days of the week and the months of the year and the AM and PM indicator text can be changed by using the Local Tags Monitor for the instance 178 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Additional Add On Instructions Appendix D Name Short Description Long Description File Name T_Valid Is DateTime Valid This instruction tests the given DateTime variable and verifies that it is a valid calend
183. is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Cfg_MaxShelfT Type Path Object Alarm Com_AE 5 for the unshelve tag Check the Auto Reset checkbox so the alarm automatically resets when acknowledged Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 5 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 97 Chapter 3 98 Common Configuration Considerations Alarm with FactoryTalk View ME Software This section describes how to configure a library alarm in FactoryTalk View ME software for use with PanelView Plus and other FactoryIalk View ME terminals Because Factorylalk View ME software does not support features for suppression shelving and disabling this procedure has not changed from the method used for the Library Version 2 0 This method does support acknowledgement of alarms from the FactoryTalk View ME terminal In addition because the FactoryTalk View ME faceplates are the same as the FactoryTalk View SE faceplates operator actions for shelve unshelve disable enable and acknowledgement are recognized by the P_Alarm Add On Instruction and by the FactoryTalk SE Alarm and Event server The missing capabilities in FactoryTalk View ME include the following e Ability to shelve unshelve and disable enable from the Alarm Status Explorer there is none or Alarm Summary e Ability to provide lists of shelved suppressed or disabled alarms An operator on a FactoryIalk View ME terminal can shelve alarms or ma
184. is used in the association file Renaming a color palette entry does not break any existing associations Multiple color palette entries can have the same name but this is not recommended Follow these color palette considerations e Once a color palette entry is deleted and the palette is saved the only way to restore associations is to manually recreate them e Object names in FactoryTalk View software usually have a number on the end Names are considered to be similar if they are the same after the ending number is removed e Button icons are not associated with the color palette for the following reasons Future versions of the library can change these icons to images Button icons are global objects and do not have multiple definitions the colors need to be changed only in one file Additional color palette entries for individual button icons can increase palette maintenance Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 163 AppendixC Color Change Utility Use the Utility with other a PPY a palette to nile ae a are wa of e the Rockwell Automation Library the graphic elements in the file must be FactoryTalk View Software associated to the color palette You must create associations and save them in a Files color association file When opening an xml graphics file if the file already has an association file CAXML this automatically opened as well If an association file does not exis
185. ix F e Reference Manual publication 1756 RM006 Modular Multivariable Control MMC The Modular Multivariable control MMC function block 1 s Pro gOperReq dt PeO e E baller feist Pe faa Fra gCasRaih eq 37750 9 1 L 0 00 Fro gAutoReg 0 00 P y 0 a Fro g a nualReg Pra gQvenide Req E Fra gHan dReq 0 E3 100 00 controls two process variables a Faceplate caren MEO ay manipulating up to three Slava i lt a control variables The MMC a function block calculates the E r a om tq control variables CV1 CV2 and Pm IE a pva M CV3 in the Auto mode based im oo i y mE on the PV1 SP1 PV2 SP2 oinm Cees 00 3200 E deviation internal model and tuning The MMC function block is a flexible model based algorithm that can be used in two basic configuration modes e Three control variables used to control two interacting process variables e Two control variables used to control two interacting process variables Click the links to access e faceplates in Appendix F e Reference Manual publication 1756 RM006 0 0 00 P H 100 00 Global Object Add On Instruction MMC _O1 mac MMC 0 04 PVeu1 fi 0 22 PVeul 35 00 PYeut 32 00 Peut Mio dular hiu liia lable Control c lt Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 47 Advanced Process Control Instructions PIDE RMPS TOT These APC i
186. k Data Source Data Collection Advanced Communication Mixing Station W Autobrowse Refresh oo a w Workstation NAUSMAYS1LW45R1 ProjectT emplate ae gi SS Ethernet Ring H a AB_ETHIP 1 Ethernet Store Station G E AB _VBP 1 1789 A17 A Virtual Chassis eee we E 00 Workstation NAUSMAYSIWASR1 E z 01 RSLinx Enterprise Desktop RSLinx Enterprise Desktop H fi 16 1756 EN T 1756 EN2T A Hew Clone Delete Apply Help 7 Inthe left pane find the Topic that points to your controller or create a new one 8 Open your new spreadsheet file Use the active content if you get a warning message 9 Type the Topic name in all of the rows of column G of the Setup sheet Be sure you are going to the correct controller 10 Open an Add On Instruction instance by clicking the respective tab name at the bottom of the screen Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 123 Appendix A 124 Online Configuration Tool 11 Incolumn C starting in row 10 type the backing tag names for your Add On Instruction instances B C D 1 P Din Discrete Input Read From CLX 3 Send To CLX 3 4 Description Description for display on HMI 5 Usage Local 6 Data Type STRING 40 T Cfo iy i 9 Discrete Inp 10 12 On the Setup sheet type the number of instances of each Add On Instruction in column D IMPORTANT Make sure you switched to the Setup sheet for step 12 Do not change
187. kwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 RFS el Ramp Soak CO CurrentSegProg CurrentSeg C J OutPrag SoaakTimeLeft O CO SoakTimeProg GuarkhampOn E fe FrogProgReg GuarSoakOn F EF ProgOperReg ProgQper F E Frog AutoReg ProghlanualReg E ProgHoldReg Ramp value Soak alue SoakTime Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Display Elements A display element global object is created once and can be referenced multiple times on multiple displays in an application When changes are made to the original base object the instantiated copies reference objects are automatically updated Use of global objects in conjunction with tag structures in the ControlLogix system aid consistency and save engineering time Descriptions Display Element Description Ramp Soak global object Ramp Soak Ar O00 deg F 5 51 deg F E Operator Tab The faceplate initially opens to the Operator Home tab From here an operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator mode Ramp Soak Soaking Current Segment Soak Time Lett 4 0 17922 73 0 0 P 0 00 P Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 249 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The following table lists the functions on of the RMPS Operator tab Table 81 RMPS Operator Tab Description Click to
188. l current alarms in the ME alarm server tag database when importing an XML file To keep existing ME alarms we suggest that you export the alarms to an XML file and then select that file in the SaveAs dialog box Click No to have the Alarms Builder tool to append to that file It can take a few minutes to generate the ME XML file 5 Click OK Custom Build The Alarm Builder s ME tag configuration values are initialized to the default values defined in the Logix data types alarm definitions Some of the ME configuration parameters severity acknowledge required can be configured synched with the Logix tag values A Synchronize ME amp Logix Tags Follow these steps 1 Right click the alarm server name and from the pull down menu choose Build ME Alarms XML Import File gt Select Review ME Alarms Ea HM Alarm Servers Change Controllers Associated with Alarm Server Rename Alarm Server Remove Alarm Server Build FactoryTalk A amp E Alarms ML Import File Build Pararneter File for SE Alarm Summary Filter Tree Build Pararneter File for SE Alarm Summary Filter Tree with Alarm Tag Mares Compare Logis Tags with AE Configuration Build ME Alarms XML Inport File k Expand All Quick Build fuse default options selecti Rewiew MIE Alarms R A message box appears 2 Click Yes Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 151 AppendixB Alarms Bui
189. larming e Alarms for deviation from a reference value Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM018 Dual Sensor Analog Input P_AlnDual The P_ AlnDual instruction monitors one analog process variable PV by using two analog input signals dual sensors dual transmitters dual input channels This instruction has the following advanced features that are not included in the basic analog input e Dual inputs e Alarm if difference between the two input PVs exceeds a configured limit Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM019 Object Elements Global Object ES AN 20 19 Bbl Day M Add On Instruction P_AlnAdy E Advanced Analog Input Yal D Val_InpP D Val_HiHiLim D Wal_HiLim D Val_LoLim D Val_LoLoLim D Val_HiRoCLim D Val_HiDevLim A Val_LoDevLim D Global Object Add On Instruction P_AlnDual Dual Analog Input Val D Val_AvgPV D Val_MinPY D Val_MaxP D Val_HiHiLim D Val_HiLim 2 Val_LoLim D Val_LoLoLim A Sts PVASel amp Sts_PVBSel a Sts_AvgSel PB Sts_MinSel a Sts_MaxSel f Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplate Refinery Pipeline Flow AJL AA elle al e A 3 03 fe HH 36 5 H 36 Ha 3 a en Bbl Day Substitute n ja 20 27 Eira pm LE 05 Target 20 00 2000 Rate of Change 26 2 00 0 2 00 0 04 a E eae Faceplate Bioreactor 1 pH
190. late A brief description of each Library object is provided in the following pages to help you select functionality for your system The overviews include sample displays and links to the respective Add On Instruction manual Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 13 Chapter1 Overview Table 2 lists objects per category Table 2 Library Object Table of Contents Library Object Library Object Library Object Page PowerFlex 523 525 VF Drives P_PF52x Steam et Given a and 39 Basic Analog Input P_Aln PowerFlex 753 Drive P_PF753 a Steam a Given Pressure and Entropy 39 P_Steam_ps Analog Input Channel P_AlChan 15 PowerFlex 755 Drive P_PF755 755 Drive P_PF755 28 Cross Functional Advanced Analog Input P_AlnAdv noe 50 Smart Lin P_SMC50 in Gate Delay P_Gate Dual Sensor Analog Input P_AlnDual te Flex Smart Motor Controller _ with First Out and Bypass P_SMCFlex P_Intlk Multiple Analog Input P_AlnMulti aan Variable speed Drive P_VSD 29 Permissive with Permissives with Bypass P_Perm P_Perm Discrete Input Object P_DIn ie E1 Plus Overload Relay P_E1PlusE Central Reset P_Reset Discrete Output P_DOut E3 E3 Plus Overload Relay P_E30vid CEN Common Alarm Block P_Alarm Analog Output P_AQut 18 6300 Overload 300 Overload Relay P_E3000vrld P_E3000vrld 31 Common Common Mode Block P_Mode Block P_Mode Pressure Temperature Compensated F
191. lbar icon and choose Digital The Digital Alarm Properties dialog box appears empty for a new alarm The example shows data for instructional purposes Digital Alarm Properties ea Digital Status Tags Control Tags Name P50_Motor_Alm_FailT oStart Input Tag Mix P50_Motor FailT esta Com_AE 9 as Condition Input lt gt 0 F Latched Severity 751 V Acknowledge required ae F Show Alarm as a Tag Minimum duration 0 Seconds Message Pump P 50 Motor Failed to Start ID 66 New Edit Browse Associated tags Alarm Class P_Motor x FactoryT alk View Display RA BAS P_Motor Faceplate T Mix P50_Motor Mix Command BSD Gecopsee sl Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 93 Chapter 3 94 Common Configuration Considerations IMPORTANT _ Inthe Com_AE local tag bit 0 circled in the example on page 93 is the alarm condition required for the digital alarm in the FactoryTalk Alarm and Event setup 4 Complete the Digital Alarm Properties dialog box Topic Description Name Type a unique designator for the object as well as a short description of the alarm In the example P50_Motor identifies the P_Motor object and Alm_FailToStart identifies the alarm Input Tag Type bit 0 of the Com_AE local tag in the P_Alarm instance You can click Browse to select the path and object but not for lo
192. lder Tool The Set Alarm Builder s ME Tag Configuration Parameters to Logix Tag Parameter Values dialog box appears et Alarni Gelcbers ll Tag onli ation Pareneebers to Logix Tag Parameter Valers l a En Lagm Tags Configured wah Alanns Synchronizedon Parameters LL haquinSiaaon AJ 02 _ hen LVL WeaaquinSiaion Al_ TO LViU_MasqurisSiaton AJ_ 172 LAU Was qurioSteadn Al 173 VU MoasquioStaton BAF 15 WU MosquipStation Bar 152 LWW MasquinStaticn EAL PSI tte F ico geed set the tag s ME expor fag io the Logix tag s alem element enabled HosAlnrm value NOTE The tag s ME exqpoc fleg is used by the sofwere to determine if the tag is added to the ME XML impor file Bis nol pert ofthe ME tag configuration men The top half of the dialog box lists the Logix tags that are configured with ME alarm definitions and synchronization data type elements The bottom half of the dialog box lets you specify the synchronize options to use 3 Click one of the tabs in the bottom half of the dialog box based on the parameters that you want to synchronize Sync HasAlarm is the tab selected in our example IMPORTANT The ME tag is added to the ME XML import file if the Logix tag s HasAlarm value is set to 1 For example if a P_Aln tag is configured with a Cfg_HasHiHiAlm equal to 1 and Cfg_HasHiAlm equal to 0 the Alarms Builder tool adds a HiHi alarm ME tag to the XML import file and does not add a Hi alarm
193. lete synchronization D Review Individual AE Alarm Tag Configuration The Review AE Tag Configuration for Logix Tags dialog box lets you streamline and review the AE alarm tags that are generated for each Logix tag Pumps ProcessObjects_3_1_00 FQIC_2_ChanRate Name Type severity 750 2 7 i J 1 In the left pane click a Logix tag node The associated AE alarm tag appears in the right pane The Export column checkboxes are checked for the alarm tags if the tag values were synchronized to the Logix values see page 138 2 Click the Edit AE Parameters button to change the severity values Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B E Review Edit XML File Build Options The Export Tags to AE Alarms XML Import File dialog box lets you review options for building the AE alarms XML import file Naming Messages View Command Language Arrays Show Status and Control Tags Alarm Class AE Alarm Tag Naming Convention vi Use Logix Tag Name as Alarm Taq Name use this option only if all the taq names in the system are unique vi If Confiqured Use Parent Folder Name as Alarm Taq Name Prefix Use Underscore Character as Delimiter in Alarm Taq Name e q ControllerName_ProgqramName_TaqName or ParentFolderName_TaqName Use Space Character as Delimiter in Alarm Taq Name fe g ControllerName ProgramName TaqName or ParentFolde
194. lette a sys eee sea a nj o ee ey ee Se ee eee eee ey oe eee ees os See pe ee ey T a a a 2 r r 7 s n ArH eee a EEEE A a P A i a x ng E IE DuA aie hi e TTT eS Ae a e ed T A A LON Rate Cutoff Background PY Target Line Comm Fail Text Color J a n ATE me R gt pe paaa mim leita hd saamid iman a inn Shem bianna maa ini me eed Sel eben dees m een aT A a Ea eee er 4 Click the Choose Color ame icon to select a new color 5 Repeat step 4 for each color that needs to be changed Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 161 Appendix Color Change Utility 6 To see where a color is used right click a color and choose Search for Instances 3 7 Click Save All a to save all of the graphic files along with their association files and the color palette file ce Process Library Customization Tool t yt RABAS P_D45D Graphics Library umi i RABAS P_D4SD Motor Graphics Library smi E3 RA BAS P_OOut Graphics Library uml Ei RABAS P_Moto2 Spd Graphics Library wmi St RA BAS P_Motor Giaphice Libian smi ts GO Verionid P_MetorGiashees_ibraty Greupl Els GO_P_Motor_A Group Hy bloto HS Staus Mubb State Indicator id y Mioto Display Group iB bloto Group Group blotor Touckhpoint Rectangle a beter AlemPokgon Rectangle y GOF hole U Group E GOF Mow D Group iw GOP Hotu nine U Group 8 Import the
195. ll Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 M101 Out_Run Local 4 0 Data 3 Common Configuration Considerations Page 83 86 87 92 98 105 107 110 111 instruction Use whatever language is best for your application Chapter 3 This chapter includes programming considerations that are common for all Process Objects Multiple programming languages are available for your Library Add On Instructions based on the type of application that you are creating The Add On Instruction logic can be used with Ladder Diagram Function Block Diagram Review the following programming language examples for the P_Motor 83 Chapter3 Common Configuration Considerations Figure 4 Function Block Diagram Sngle Speed Motor Ni O01 P_Motor Sngle Speed Motor lt 0 Loca 3 Data6 D 4 Inp_RunFadkk Out_Run Ee e Local 4 0 Data 3 Figure 5 Structured Text MlO1l Inp PunFdbk P Motor M1lol Local 4 0 Data 3 MLOL Out Bun Local 3 1i_ Data_6 Once created an Add On Instruction can then be used in any of the RSLogix 5000 software routines without any additional effort on your part This provides the flexibility of interfacing to the library through the programming method that you use for developing control strategies in the application code Ladder Diagram logic executes simple boolean logic timers and counters the fastest Function Block Diagrams and
196. ll Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B 1 Select Controller This section describes how to associate a Logix controller to Factorylalk View HMI servers and data servers so the Alarm Builder tool can create HMI alarm tags The tool obtains server information from specified FactoryTalk View directories which use default FactoryIalk View installation settings The HMI server and data server information can be entered manually if necessary Follow these steps to add a controller to the Alarms Builder software tool 1 From the Tools amp Utilities folder in the downloaded library files open the Alarms Builder tool A Quick Start PDF file opens in a separate Adobe PDF Reader window Review the Quick Start guide and close the Adobe window The PlantPAx Alarms Builder and Tag Data Edit Tool window appears 2 Right click Logix Controllers and choose Add Controller a PlantPAx Alarms Builder and Tag Data Edit Tool File View Tools Windows Help a rs 7 Add Controller dry i The Select Logix ACD File dialog box appears a Select Logix ACD File mEn Segr Rockwell Automation RSLogix S000 Search RSLogix S000 p Organize New folder f il 7 ay Labuser Name 3 Date modified Public i ee A Logs 5 28 2014 12 40 PM eskto p l 5 WA ProcessObjects_3_1 00 20140624 V20Em 10 20 2014 3 05 PM avorites ae G ProcessObjects_3 FE 0
197. ll Process Objects Object faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Faceplate Objects Global objects used on IMC faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Graphics Librarys RA BAS ME BuiltIn Graphics Librarys Builtin display elements used to build process graphics RA BAS BuiltIn Help Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Help Objects Builtln global objects used for all Builtin help displays Graphics Images BMP All png files in the images folder All png files in the images folder These are the common icons used in the global objects and faceplates for all Process Objects HMI Tags FTVME_Pla ntPAxLib_Tags_3_1_00 csv These tags must be imported into the FactoryTalk View ME project to support switching tabs on any Process Object faceplate 1 The service release number boldfaced can change as service revisions are created 218 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 WMC O1 Niel C held dalar hiu hea abla Cordral CIE O ZEU O SEU D SPD IFO E Fro gOp Rag E Prag Ch Auth eq E Pio gC 2A ubhR eg F Pra gC Jute E Fra gEW Aa ru al Aag a Fm gt ht a r al Aen E Fro gey Aa ru al Aag CUSO wida E Prog CW Oren de Aeg E Pra g Ci dIe de Arg E Pio gC Arem de Aeq GO_BuiltIn _MMC2 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Display Elements A display element global object is created once and can be referenced multiple times on multiple di
198. loop The CV has reached a low limit and cannot control the loop 54 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Standard Buttons The Library of Process Objects uses a standard set of buttons across its HMI objects The following section illustrates these items Table 22 Enable and Disable Buttons Enable Device Disable Device Table 23 Alarm Buttons Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledge and Reset all alarms for an object Shelve Alarm Unshelve Alarm gt Enable Alarm Disable Alarm Table 24 Mode Buttons a Lock Operator Mode E Unlock Operator Mode Request Operator Mode p Request Program Mode Request Maintenance Mode X Release Maintenance Mode Navigate to Mode Configuration Display Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 55 Chapter1 Overview Table 25 PID Buttons Button Description Description Request Auto Loop mode Request Normal Loop mode Table 26 Miscellaneous Command Buttons Button Description Description Move to state Move to position Clear Counter Capture snapshot Captures the current state of the object Table 27 Mix proof Valve Buttons Open Valve pi Close Valve Lift Valve Lower Seat Lift Valve Upper Seat SIP CIP Valve Lower Seat SIP CIP Valve Upper Seat SIP CIP Valve Cavity 56 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overv
199. low a intar ae S Run Time and Start Counter P_RunTime DE Operator Prompt P_Prompt P_PTComp Tank Strapping Table P_StrapTbl w Restart Inhibit for Large Motor P_ResInh Boolean Logic with Snapshot P_Logic Regulatory Control Valves Diagnostic Objects Proportional Integral Derivative a a Control Valve P_ValveC Logix Change Detector L_ChangeDet Enhanced P_PIDE Analog Fanout P_Fanout 21 Hand Hand operated Valve P_ValveHO Valve P_ValveHO 34 Logix Controller CPU Utilization L_CPU Controller CPU Utilization L_CPU 44 High or Low Selector P_HiLoSel E irae a Motor operated Valve P_ValveMO 3 oc Logix Redundant Controller Monitor 44 L_Redun Procedural Control Mix proof Valve P_ValveMP ae Logix Task Monitor L_TaskMon Sequencer Object P_Seq Solenoid operated Valve P_ValveSO Graphics for Built in Instructions Flowmeter Dosing P_DoseFM 2 state Valve Statistics P_ValveStats ae a Weigh Scale Dosing P_DoseWS Ea n Position Device P_nPos L Coordinated Control CC Motor Control Discrete 2 3 or 4 state Device P_D4SD Internal Model Control IMC is used for valves and motors Single speed Motor P_ Motor 25 Steam SteamTable Modular Multivariable Control MMQ Multivariable Control MMC Two speed Motor P_Motor2Spd e aoa Steam Pressure P_Sat Fenn In Proportional Integral Derivative 48 Enhanced PIDE Reversing Motor P_MotorRev Saturated Steam Temperature P_
200. lowing information e Error value for PV1 and PV2 e Model factor for PV1 and PV2 Maintenance Oversample At seconds Time in seconds used to calculate the process output Operator inputs for process gain time model gain model time constant model dead time and response time constant oe PV1 PY2 Error 35 07 32 03 Model Factor 100 00 100 00 Cv1 Cv2 CV3 Cv1 Cv2 CV3 Process Gain Sign O F O Model Gain 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 Model Time Constant sec 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Model Deadtime sec 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Response Time Constant sec 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Oversample At seconds 0 000 Time in seconds used to 0 25 calculate the process output The following table shows the functions of page 2 of the MMC Maintenance tab Table 66 MMC Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description Process Gain Sign Click to select or as the Process Gain Engineering e CV1PV1ProcessGainSign sign for PV1 CV1 CV2 or CV3 PV2 CV1 Configuration e CV2PV1ProcessGainSign CV2 or CV3 Code E CV3PV1ProcessGainSign This is used only for Autotune and is the e CV1PV2ProcessGainSign sign of the process gain APV1 ACV1 e CV2PV2ProcessGainSign CV3PV2ProcessGainSign Model Gain Type the Operator model gain for PV1 Configurationand e CV1PV1ModelGain CV1 CV2 or CV3 PV2 CV1 CV2 or V3 Tuning CV2PV1Mo
201. ls on using graphic objects see page 113 X and Y Positioning The Global Object Parameter Values dialog box which is used for specifying faceplate coordinates has two optional parameters 120 and 121 Global Object Parameter Yalues x mame ae a Description 1 102 ProcessObjix MyP FIDE vee Object Tag P PID 103 ees Path include program scope if tag is a program scope tag Additional display parameter e g 4100 or CC optional Additional display parameter e g V100 optional uses 0 Always show Faceplate 1 Show Quick Display For users Cancel Help Parameters 120 and 121 let you specify additional display command switches These additional switches can be used to specify where the faceplate appears on your screen For example x150 in parameter 120 and Y50 specify the faceplate appears 150 pixels from the left and 50 pixels from the top These parameters are optional and do not need to be specified Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 107 Chapter3 Common Configuration Considerations Table 36 and Table 37 describe the position parameters and how to use them with the 120 and 121 global object parameters respectively Table 36 Corner and Center Positioning Global Object Parameter Description 120 Top right corner Top left corner Bottom left corner Bottom right corner Centered on top edge Centered on bottom edge
202. lt tagname gt Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 125 AppendixA Online Configuration Tool Notes 126 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Before You Begin Appendix B Alarms Builder Tool This section provides basic procedures for using the Alarms Builder tool to expedite creating alarms in the PlantPAx system The stand alone tool is used with FactoryIalk View software for creating the following types of alarm systems e Tag based polling Alarm and Event AE server page 128 e FactoryTalk View Machine Edition ME HMI alarms page 148 The Alarms Builder tool uses the data types in an RSLogix 5000 project and associates a FactoryTalk View Site Edition SE HMI faceplate display to each Logix alarm definition The tool automatically configures a SE command with the alarm tag when the import files are built IMPORTANT Ifyou work only with FactoryTalk View ME software you can associate the controller to a ME application The ME alarm system does not provide the functionality to execute FactoryTalk View commands The Alarms Builder software is among the Library of Process Objects files that must be downloaded The library zip files are available from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support downloads page You also must have RSLogix 5000 software installed RSLogix 5000 services which a
203. mended to correspond to a safe state output of the loop 192 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 PV Deviation Action Priority Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Table 49 CC Maintenance Tab Page 4 Description CV EU Maximum Type the maximum value for CV1EU Engineering e CVIEUMax CV2EU or CV3EU Configuration CV2EUMax The value of CV1EU CV2EU or CV3EU that Code E e CV3EUMax corresponds to 100 CV1 CV2 or CV3 CV EU Minimum Type the minimum value for CV1EU e CVIEUMin CV2EU or CV3EU e CV2EUMin The value of CV1EU CV2EU or CV3EU that e CV3EUMin corresponds to 0 CV1 CV2 or CV3 Engineering Tab The Engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges options for device and I O setup displayed text and faceplate to faceplate navigation settings for initial system commissioning or later system changes The Engineering tab is divided into two pages Engineering Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the CC Engineering tab has various Operator inputs and options for the CV model gain and PV deviation A Gee e DB Ek Engineering 1 2 Paes ittannal Made Model Gain units aoe i EU Place instruction in Manual mode while C nitializing is set Reset Program Inputs after each execution Target Response Time Constant 0 000 P Deviation Action Priority Cv CV2 CV3 First amp Second oS Third Rockwell A
204. mit for the PV in Engineering PVEUMax engineering units Configuration Code E Type the minimum limit for the PV in PVEUMin engineering units Gain CV1 CV2 and Enter the CV1 CV2 or CV3 gain for the Configurationand e CV1ModelGain V3 appropriate model Tuning C V2ModelGain Maintenance e CV3ModelGail Code D Time Constant CV1 Enter the CV1 CV2 or CV3 time constant CV1ModelTC V2 and CV3 for the appropriate model e CV2ModelTC CV3ModelTC Dead Time CV1 Enter the internal model deadtime CV1ModelDT CV2 and CV3 for CV1 CV2 or CV3 for the e CV2ModelDT appropriate model e V3ModelDT 190 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Table 47 CC Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description RIC CV1 V2 and Enter the CV1 CV2 or CV3 response time Configurationand e CV1RespIC V3 constant for the appropriate model Tuning e CV2RespIC This value determines the speed of the CV Maintenance e CV3RespIC action in seconds Code D Target Value CV1 Enter the target value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 e CV1Target CV2 and CV3 for the appropriate model e CV2Target e CV3Target Maintenance Tab Page 3 Page 3 of the CC Maintenance tab shows the following information e Program value in percent e CV Track value e Calculated CV from Maintenance page 2 Current Value Current Value Used on next page
205. n Mode indicators provide a visual reference to the current owner of the process device The modes available are listed on the Operator tab as shown in the example ial nT 1 j pf MaAilinhlenante F Mi 0 Standard modes are implemented in each object by using an embedded instance of the P_Mode Add On Instruction The available modes are Operator Program Override Maintenance and Hand Not all modes are used in every object The particular modes available for a given object are listed in the Reference Manual for that object The Mode buttons on the faceplate show the behavior to expect when clicked Clicking the button acquires Operator mode and takes Clicking the button locks the Operator mode and prevents from Program Program from acquiring Clicking the button releases Operator mode and returns Clicking unlocks the Operator mode and lets Program acquire to Program 86 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 Alarm Considerations Effective alarm management is an important function of a process control system This section describes how to use Factorylalk View Alarm and Event software to create alarms for library objects to help safeguard personnel and plant assets IMPORTANT Version 3 1 of the Rockwell Automation Library requires FactoryTalk View software version 7 0 or later FactoryTalk Alarm and Event software within View 7 0 supports
206. n Start CV Autotune Button Stop CV Autotune Button The following table lists the functions on of the CC Autotune Operator tab Table 52 CC Autotune Operator Tab Description Function Process Type Approximation Factor CV Step Size CV1 CV2 or CV3 Noise Level PV Tuning Limit Autotune Timeout Current Gain Current Time Constant Current Dead Time Current Response Time Constant Type a value for the integrating model approximation factor Security Click on either Integrating or Non inegrating Configuration and Tuning Maintenance Code D IMPORTANT You can enter this value only when Integrating is selected as the Process Type Type a value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 step size in percent for the tuning step test Click on Low Medium or High to set the estimate of the noise level expected on the PV to compensate for it during tuning Type a value for the PV tuning limit scaled in PV units When Autotune is running and predicted PV exceeds this limit the tuning is aborted Type a value for the maximum time for autotune to complete following the CV step change When autotune exceeds this time tuning is aborted Type a value for the internal model gain for CV1 CV2 or CV3 Enter a positive or negative gain depending on process direction Type a value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 internal model time constant in seconds Type a value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 internal model deadtime in seconds Typ
207. n a value for Proportional Proportional gain Integral Integral gain Derivative Derivative gain Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Alarms Tab The Autotune Alarms tab shows all the available alarms for the device and the current status of each alarm Autotune Built In PIDE Faceplate Help The Faceplate Help page shows the indicators and command buttons that are used by the Built in Autotune PIDE Autotune Faceplate Help Commands El rw 7 ei Release Autotune Tag at Acquire Autotune Tag E pi Autotune Start m Abort Autotune gains into the current PIDE Gain i Use Gains Copy the selected Tags Ptsain lain and Dain Instructions 1 Press the Acquire button to acquire the Autotune Tag 2 select Process Type enter CY Step Size and PW Change Limit 3 Press the Autotune Start Button 4 Once the Autotune sequence completes check any errors before continuing 5 Use the radio buttons to select the desired set of gains 6 Press the Use Gains button to copy the selected gains into the current PIDE Gain Tags f Press the Release button to release the Autotune Tag Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 185 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Coordinated Control CC The Coordinated Control CC function block control
208. nance Tab Page 1 Description Function Operator Ratio Loop Ratio High and Low SP Limits High and Low Allow SP to track PV in Manual mode Error does not need to cross zero to be in deadband Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Type a ratio operator multiplier Normal Operation RatioOper of Devices Code A Type values for the high and low ratio Configurationand e RatioHLimit limits Tuning e RatioLLimit These values limit the value of Ratio Maintenance obtained from Operator or Program Ratio Code D Type the high and low limits for the e SPHLimit setpoint e SPLLimit Click to have SP track PV when in Manual Equipment PVTracking mode Maintenance This setting is ignored when in Cascade or Code Auto mode Click to disable zero crossing for the Configurationand ZCOff deadband calculation Tuning Maintenance Code D 237 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Maintenance Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the PIDE Maintenance tab shows the following information e Process error e PV scaled input e PV expressed as a percent of span e SP expressed as a percent of span e Error expressed as a percent of span e Feed forward value Built In PIDE Ci Error B1 Deadband ey les Re cece 0 00 SP IBU 60 00 PW EU Min Max 100 00 0 00 PV percent of span ti 113 Yo 60 00 Yo SP percent of span ae E
209. ned as the following Yr DINT year Mo DINT month Da DINT day Hr DINT hour Min DINT minute Sec DINT second uSec DINT microsecond T_GRT DateTime gt DateTime This instruction compares two Date and Time of Day DateTime variables T_GRT_1_0 01_AQI L5X If DT1 is greater than after DT2 EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 This instruction can be used in Ladder Diagram Structured Text or Function Block Routines just like the GRT instruction is used for integers and floating point numbers However because it has InOut Parameters tag references to user defined types it is not left justified on ladder rungs On a False rung in LD or in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 IMPORTANT This instruction is dependent on the user defined type DateTime external to this Add On Instruction definition DateTime is defined as the following Yr DINT year Mo DINT month Da DINT day Hr DINT hour Min DINT minute Sec DINT second uSec DINT microsecond 172 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Name T_LEQ T_LES Additional Add On Instructions Appendix D Short Description Long Description File Name DateTime lt DateTime DateTime lt DateTime This instruction compares two Date and Time of Day DateTime variables If DT1 i
210. nload the Library 65 Using HMI and Controller Templates 66 Adding Controller Logic 66 Import Visualization Files 72 Download the Libra ry For the latest compatible software information and to download the Rockwell Automation Library see the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support pcdc page IMPORTANT To download virtual templates see the Virtual Image Templates User Manual publication 9528 UM001 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 65 Chapter2 How to Install the Library Using HMI and Controller There is a Templates folder within the Rockwell Automation Library download Temp ates This folder has HMI and controller templates for creating a PlantPAx system However the HMI templates do not include Library objects You must import the Library objects into the FactoryTalk View SE and ME templates respectively Contrarily some of the controller templates have pre loaded library content if the Library is to be used with your application For more information see the following e PlantPAx System Application Templates Quick Start publication PROCES QS001 e Importing visualization files on page 72 IMPORTANT You canuse library objects other than the Rockwell Automation Library objects However we suggest that you follow the instructions in this section to make sure of properly configuring the visualization files in your project A
211. nstruction is dependent on the user defined type DateTime external to this Add On Instruction definition DateTime is defined as the following Yr DINT year Mo DINT month Da DINT day Hr DINT hour Min DINT minute Sec DINT second uSec DINT microsecond T_Ltol LTIME to DateTime This instruction converts an LTIME 64 bit integer timestamp for example from an ALMD T_Ltol_1_0 01_AOI L5X or ALMA instruction or the WALLCLOCKTIME object to a DateTime year month day hour minute second microsecond as DINTs in Coordinated Universal Time UTC offset 0 The input LTIME is the 64 bit LINT number of microseconds since DT 1970 01 01_00 00 00 000000 UTC 174 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Additional Add On Instructions Appendix D Name Short Description Long Description File Name T_NEQ DateTime lt gt DateTime This instruction compares two Date and Time of Day DateTime variables T_NEQ_1_0 01_ AOI L5X If DT1 is not equal to DT2 EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 This instruction can be used in Ladder Diagram Structured Text or Function Block Routines just like the NEQ instruction is used for integers and floating point numbers However because it has InOut Parameters tag references to user defined types it is not left justified on ladder rungs On a False rung in LD or
212. nstruction is use to manipulate an analog r 7 We A x output to control a field device such as a control valve or Analog Output M T a Fy motorized gate positioner The 0 00 M output responds to an Operator manual or Program setting of Controlled Variable 38 50 38 50 the Controlled Variable CV signal Add On Instruction The P_AOut instruction Y controls the analog output in a P_AQut J Pee bens age AA variety of modes monitoring Jews An ye for fault conditions seg ones eb El Inp_Ovrd Click the link to access the itii Increase Change Limit 10 00 10 00 Reference Manual Decrease Change Limit 10 00 10 00 SYSLIB RM011 Pressure Temp Compensated Flow The P_PTComp Instruction is intended as a calculation function only between other P_PTComp blocks and no HMI components are provided The P_PTComp instruction is used to calculate a flow at Add On Instruction standard temperature and pressure essentially a mass P_PTComp eal flow rate given a volumetric Press Temp Compensator flow rate or differential q Inp 7 Act Qut_Flow D pressure measurement This Ing _P Act instruction also requires g Inp DP Act measurements of the actual O Inp_F_Act temperature and pressure of the flowing gas Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM032 18 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Table 3 1 0 Processing Process Object Description Tank Strapping Ta
213. nstructions regulate control of process variables and values Table 13 APC Instructions Process Object Description Enhanced PID PIDE The PIDE instruction provides enhanced capabilities over the standard PID instruction The instruction uses the velocity form of the PID algorithm The gain terms are applied to the change in the value of error or PV not the value of error or PV The PIDE instruction uses a velocity form PID algorithm similar to that used in most DCS systems An advantage to a velocity form algorithm includes a bumpless adaptive gain change changing gains on the fly without initializing the algorithm Click the links to access e faceplates in Appendix F e Reference Manual publication 1756 RM006 Ramp Soak RMPS The RMPS instruction provides for a number of segments of alternating ramp and soak periods The RMPS instruction is typically used to provide a temperature profile in a batch heating process The output of this instruction is typically the input to the setpoint of a PID loop The RMPS instruction can be controlled by either Program mode or Operator mode Control can be changed any time Click the links to access e faceplates in Appendix F e Reference Manual publication 1756 RM006 Object Elements Global Object Built In PIDE py 122IBU D cy 0 00 M Add On Instruction PIDE_01 PIDE EI Enhanced PID Global Object Ramp Soak PY 0 00 deg F 5 5
214. nth and day to estimate the sunrise and sunset times to within a couple minutes It does not deal with detailed astronomical calculations based on planetary models It is based on the current Gregorian calendar and does not deal with Julian dates for dates before 1582 For algorithms see http www srrb noaa gov highlights sunrise solareqns PDF To get your latitude and longitude see http www batchgeocode com lookup 176 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Name T_Sync Additional Add On Instructions Appendix D Short Description Long Description File Name Synchronize Controller Clock This object synchronizes the controller real time clock with a reliable NTP Time Server T_Sync_1_0 04_AOI L5X computer responsible for network time or a standard time server like time windows com T_Sync_1_0 04_RUNG L5X IMPORTANT This is not a full NTP precision exchange It is simply a quick get of the NTP server time and applying it to the controller clock It supports the following features Ability to sync controller clock to server on Maintenance command Ability to sync on a periodic default daily basis Ability to retry on a periodic default hourly basis on a failure to retrieve date time from server Ability to sync on controller powerup or PROGRAM to RUN transition Ability via configuration to allow or disallow each of the above methods Reads time from NTP server and displays
215. nto three tabs Maintenance Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the IMC Maintenance tab shows the following information e The ratio Program multiplier e The Cascade setpoint value in PV units e The setpoint Program value in PV units e The PV value e The setpoint value in PV units 204 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 IMC Operator Ratio Multiplier ol 1 00 Fatio D n 1 00 Operator Ratio Multiplier Fatio Limits Ratio Limits 1 00 High and Low 1 00 1 00 oP Cascade Cascade Setpoint Value gt coc x Allow SP to track PY in manual mode Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions 50 56 0 00 B 1199 SP Limits 100 00 0 00 SP Appendix F Setpoint Operator Value Setpoint Program Value PV Value SP Limits Maximum Minimum Setpoint Value The following table shows the functions of page 1 of the IMC Maintenance tab Table 56 IMC Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description Function Operator Ratio Multiplier Ratio Limits High and Low Operator Setpoint SP Limits Allow SP to track PV in manual mode Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Type a value for the Ratio Operator multiplier Ratio is set to this value when in Operator control Type a value for the Ratio high and low limits These parameters limit the value of Ratio obtained from RatioProg or RatioOper Type a value for the SP Operator value
216. ol Instructions PIDE RMPS TOT 48 Standard Symbols and Indicators s i i dedseaiathewgendicebiawares 50 Standard BUttOnsS 2h ot sake doate tu iawn ease eee A dadeeweeaned 55 Olek Dp oo berereacaan se eaes enna cen E ates 60 Duileim Quick Drp eorn eea eave peer eoenes 63 Chapter 2 Download the Libra yesss piaeoan cs We A oes 65 Using HMI and Controller Templates 0 eee eee ee eee 66 Addin Controller Logic ascetics bettie EEE 66 Add an Add On Instruction to a Routine 2 0000 69 Import Vista lization PiE Seeria ee eed s panne etuaee a 72 lin port IMases ir eE dase Sek saeauweswiieta seeds pe Import Global Object Files ais sev2tates buseineadewnbewecnliews 74 Import HMLE Faceplates esere cise ave OEE 75 limportthe Mir On teas cnqayeewivecs taser dacs EEEE 76 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 5 Table of Contents Common Configuration Considerations Use the Library Online Configuration Tool Alarms Builder Tool Chapter 3 Library Programming Considerations cee ee cece ee ees 83 Ladder Diagram Considerations cuticiatavariadssaneeswstetes 84 E EES ET ta eR ek see e eae eee Rene Reo ees 85 Mode Coniiouration 34i view rosin ins ciedseonesoreonitiwasaeesceets 86 Ahram Consid rations dc2canes ok oacs EERE AA EAER 87 Alarm with FactoryTalk Alarm and Event Server 92 Alarm with FactoryTalk View ME Software 00005 98 Security
217. omation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 117 Chapter4 Use the Library 13 Onan HMI screen access the display that contains the global object 14 Click the global object to access a faceplate Running OF Product 1 Transfer Pump A E 2 i A i Home Operator z operator ef a PROD XFER PUMP P 1 i Running PiO1 Motor 15 Click command buttons on the faceplate to operate the device IMPORTANT See Appendix C to change the color on a display element or faceplate 118 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Use the Library Chapter 4 Device Configuration You can configure the device parameters by doing one of the following steps e Type values in the Parameters tab of the RSLogix 5000 software program e Check a checkbox for each command on the Engineering tab of the instruction s HMI faceplate Product 1 Transfer Pump General Parameters Local Tags Scan Modes Signature Change History Help Name Defaut Style Rec Vis Description ExtermalAccess_ Cai Cia HasintkObi 0 Decimal_ LI I 1 Enable navigat Read Write CiaHasResl O Decimal LI I 1 Enable navigat Read Write Cig HasRunt Decimal_ L LI 1 Enablenavigat Read wite Cig Hastvid 0 Decimal L L 1 Enable navigat Read Write 1 Decimal Read Write Decimal LI Defaut Mode 1 Read wiite
218. on the HMI faceplates Data cannot be entered or changed without an administrator granting permission with the Table 12 Maintenance Tab 2 Description Camping l enforced Oper and Program modes say Type the inarlock target CVn ering UT The value bs wed ior the CV when interlocked on onan PI Fauk bat the Hold Last Good Value Type the Ci Rate of Change Limit in a wiis per second This determines the rate at which change nV amet fect zen disables rete of chanae limiting The Rate of Change Limit corresponding security code on each faceplate tab The Add On Instruction documentation see page 12 lists the security codes for the functions on the faceplates See Table 41 on page 182 for a description of the Factorylalk View HMI security codes Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 181 AppendixE HMI Security Codes Configuration Table 41 FactoryTalk View Software Code Descriptions FTView A P Security Code Configuration as of 5 15 2013 Normal Production Batches amp Lots Setpoint and Parameter Override Process Exception Handling Override Force Sequences Advanced Production iS 2 cod Q O ab gt 0b Q gt non coordinated Command Equipment in Operator Mode Enter Setpoints Control Variables Reset Latched Interlocks Restart Equipment Add Batch to Batch List Run Batches Hold Restart Batc
219. oom gt Stop Totalizer Totalizer Running b Command Button Start Totalizer Target EUME i Command Button Large Deviation Pre Target 200 00 4 Small Deviation Pre Target 50 00 Previous Total before reset TES ZE Input Status Indicator Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 257 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The following table lists the functions on of the TOT Operator tab Table 86 TOT Operator Tab Description Click to request Operator mode Manual Device Operation Code B Click to request Program mode Click to reset Totalizer Normal Operation of Devices Code A Click to start Totalizer Click to stop Totalizer Target Type the target value for the totalizer input Large Deviation Type a value for the large deviation pre target value of Total Pre Target compared to Target This value is expressed as a deviation from the Target Small Deviation Type a value for the small deviation pre target value of Total Pre Target compared to Target This value is expressed as a deviation from the Target 258 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Maintenance Tab Ella 53 Low input cutoff 0 00 Reset Value 0 00 The following table shows the functions of the RMPS Maintenance tab Table 87 TOT Maintenance Tab Description Low input cutoff T
220. ors a 2 state open and close valve and records various Statistics related to stroke times and stroke counts The instruction is designed to work with the P_ValveSO P_ValveMO and P_ValveHO instructions and can be used with the P_ValveMP instruction as well Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM036 n Position Device P_nPos The P_n Pos instruction controls a circular or linear discrete device with 2 8 positions The instruction provides outputs to select an individual position and outputs to move toward increasing positions clockwise for a circular device or decreasing positions counterclockwise for a circular device Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM031 Discrete 2 3 or 4 state Device P_D4SD The P_D4SD instruction controls and monitors feedback from a discrete 2 state 3 state or 4 state device including a multiple speed motor or a multiple position valve The instruction controls up to four discrete outputs with configurable states of each output in the various device states and monitors up to four discrete feedback inputs Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM028 Add On Instruction Val_ Val_LastOpening Val_TotOpening axOpening AvgOpeningT CurrOpenedT Val_LastOpenedT TotOpenedT Val_MaxOpenedT Val_Curr Val_Last Val_Tot Val_Max Val_MAvgClosingT tOpenC tCloseC tOpenc tClaseC Val_Slow
221. ort File x z v Libraries Documents z ka Search Documents EET a Organize New folder a A R Favorites Documents library Arrange by Folder BB Desktop Includes 2 locations p Downloads ami Name Date modified Type Size E Recent Places HMI Projects RSview Enterprise 10 30 2013 8 32 4M File folder Db RSLogix 5000 Proje Rockwell Automation 9 16 2013 7 22 AM File folder Mos 3Test 1 21 2014 1 36 PM File Folder Deskto 5 L U_PowerPoints 10 8 2013 9 37 AM File Folder Libraries i LVU_InstallationFiles 10 8 2013 9 32 4M File Folder Ea Documents E My Documents FT iew Configuration Tool 9 10 2013 3 54 PM File Folder Public Documer Color Change Files 10 11 2013 12 06 PM File folder ad Music ov_Testbed xml 10 30 2013 10 23 AM XML Document E Pictures e BatchImport_PlantPAxLibrary3 xml 10 30 2013 10 23 4M XML Document 1 KB Videos B Labuser Jm Computer EE File name ov_Testbed xml Save as type XML files xml X ia Hide Folders Cancel Zi 3 Choose where to save the file and type a file name IMPORTANT Choose a file location that is easily accessible such as your desktop because you need this XML file to complete the alarms process 4 Click Save 150 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B A message box appears that asks if you want to overwrite or append to the file IMPORTANT __ FactoryTalk View ME software deletes al
222. otai h Ba aD aman flags show the reaching of 4 oe sone D Totalizer Running 0 0 E ProgOperReq rogOper the target or pre target ProgStartReq RunStop 2 values g ProgStopReq ProgResetDone FE Target 1000 00 1000 00 e Lowflowinputcutoffthat jo ree S eliminates negative raseeris o 4 Large Deviation Pre Target MEME 200 00 totalization due to slight O amp Small Deviation Pre Target 50 00 flowmeter calibration inaccuracies when the flow Previous Total before reset 1897 22 is shut off e Operator or program capability to start stop reset Click the links to access e faceplates in Appendix F e Reference Manual publication 1756 RM006 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 49 Chapter1 Overview Standard Sym bols The Library of fees nie a nen of and indicators its HMI objects Ihe following section illustrates these items and Indicators aa J 8 Table 14 Tab Navigation Icons Graphic Symbol Description 4 I Operator Home Page f TF Maintenance Page i 4 Engineering Page Feed Trends Page N Diagnostics Page Alarms Page A Alarms Page with active alarm ron Snapshot Page Table 15 Breadcrumbs Graphic Symbol Description Invalid Configuration Information Available A Maintenance Bypass is active Operator Attention do xX Maintenance Required 50 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Table 16
223. owerFlex 523 or PowerFlex 525 variable frequency drive P_PF52x PF523 PF525 ariable Frequency Drive AL o A lola Home Operator The instruction collects and Operator displays diagnostic information a EY from the drive by using configured data links on the EtherNet IP interface Stopped gt Cl I gt P_PF52x The instruction also provides Fiat es aes p oO the following capabilities ou e Starting stopping jogging Ref_FaultCodeList Dan Inp_FwdPermOK of drive and setting speed gimcraremce Saano Feedback Hz M Reverse Ino RevNBPermOK Sts Stopped E reference and direction et inn ntikOK Se shina Reference Hz 0 00 0 00 Ino NBIntlkkOK Sts Running FE Monitoringofrunfeedback 9S GEES oun er 000 Fa a display of actual drive A np Owed Senet Inp_Reset Sts_AtSpeed Sts_SpeedLimited f Sts_Available Sts_Err f Sts_Hand fe Sts_Maint z Status including acceleration deceleration direction and speed This instruction is provided as a rung import for installation Drive Ready Sts_Oper W Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM048 PowerFlex 753 Drive P_PF753 Global Object Faceplate PowerFlex 753 ariable Freq Drive AWM oe A ele The P_PF753 instruction operates one variable speed motor by using a drive AC variable frequency in a variety aves AO a Fy 4j of modes monitoring for E faul
224. p MEO Samples Lib slot Tippa Select trigger Trigger settings itis ix PSO Motor Alm FailToStar Trigger type Trigger label O Use ack all value 0 Optional trigger connections Name Tag or expression Tag Exp andshake ck emote Ack emote Ack Handshake Edit Message Notification Remove Message Handshake 8 Click Browse in the Tag column for the Ack row Ack is an abbreviation for acknowledge The Tag Browser appears when you click Browse 9 Using the Tag Browser choose the acknowledge status parameter 10 Repeat step 8 and step 9 to choose the acknowledge status parameter for the Remote Ack row Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 Your setup now looks like the example El Alarm Setup METO_ Samples Lib 3007 Triggers Select trigger Trigger settings Mix P50_Motor Alm FailToStar Trigger type Trigger label E Use ack all value D Optional trigger connections S i RemgleAck Message Remove The Ack parameter must be changed so it triggers the Operator Acknowledge Command which is part of the alarm s Local Tag within the Add On Instruction Because this parameter is in a Local Tag it cannot be browsed But the FactoryTalk View ME HMI server still can write to the tag 11 To change the Ack parameter click the tag in the Tag or expression bo
225. page Choose Graphics gt Color Change Utility gt and double click FT View CustomizationSetup msi This file installs the program and adds a shortcut to your computer s Start menu under PlantPAx Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 159 Appendix C Color Change Utility Use the Utility with Libra ry The download includes xml exports for all of the global objects and display files Objects 160 in the library for FactoryTalk View SE software Make sure that you also download the CAXML and Process Library Standard Colors xml files Follow these steps to change colors in the process library 1 From the Process Library Customization Tool File menu click Open Graphic XML File al Process Library Customization Te Close Graphics AML File Hide Reference Objects Save Graphics AML File Save Graphics AML File as Exit The Open Graphics XML Files dialog box appears Multiple global object and display files can be opened at the same time from the file open dialog box 2 Click the Colors tab and choose Open Color Palette Ls a Process Library Customization Tool ce i File Colors Open Color Palette Save Color Palette As Manage Association Files Automatically Create Color Association File m A t Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Color Change Utility Appendix C 3 Select the colors that you want to change in the pa
226. perator CV value CV1 CV2 and CV3 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Click to request Operator mode Manual Device Operation Code B Click to request Program mode Click to request Auto Loop mode Normal Operation of Devices Code A Type the SP Operator value scaled in PV units SP is set to this value when in Operator control Click to request Cascade Loop mode IMPORTANT This button is available only if Allow Cascade Ratio Mode on page 12 of the Engineering tab is checked See Engineering Tab Page 1 on page 193 Type a value for CV Operator Manual value CV is set to this value when in Operator control and Manual mode 203 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Table 55 IMC Operator Tab Description Click to request Manual Loop mode Normal Operation of Devices Code A Operator Ratio Type a value for the Ratio Operator multiplier Value Ratio is set to this value when in Operator control CV Slider CV1 CV2 Move this slider to adjust the loop CV output Equipment Maintenance and CV3 Code C SP Slider Move this slider to adjust the loop setpoint Maintenance Tab Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the IMC Maintenance tab to make adjustments to device parameters troubleshoot and temporarily work around device problems and disable the device for routine maintenance The IMC Maintenance tab is divided i
227. plate display used for the CC object RA BAS Built In CC Help RA BAS ME Built In CC Help Help information that is accessed from the CC Help faceplate RA BAS Built In CC RA BAS Built In CCQuick RA BAS ME Built In CC RA BAS ME Built In CCQuick The Quick display used for the CC object Graphics Global GGFX RA BAS Common a Objects RA BAS ME Common KEA Objects Common global objects used on all Process Objects Object faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Faceplate Objects Global objects used on CC faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Graphics Librarys RA BAS ME BuiltIn Graphics Librarys CC display elements used to build process graphics RA BAS Builtin Help Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Help Objects Builtln global objects used for all BuiltIn help displays Graphics Images All png files in the images folder All png files in the images folder These are the common icons used in the global objects and faceplates for all Process Objects HMI Tags FTVME_PlantPAxLib_Tags_3_1_ 00 sy These tags must be imported into the FactoryTalk View ME project to support switching tabs on any Process Object faceplate 1 The service release number boldfaced can change as service revisions are created 186 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 CE Cogdinaed Cantral Ej FragFio gR g A Fro gO pahieg Pra geir Aut Ae p Fra gC eu ta Aag a Pra gC saute Aeg BE Pra gC d
228. r summer time For use with HMI it also provides values for display of the Month Day and Hour Minute of the points in time when DST starts and ends Plus for logging logic it provides bits to indicate when timestamps have an overlap 1 30 a m happens twice or there is a gap one shot Follow these steps for best results 1 Clear Cfg_EnableDST to 0 2 Open the Controller Properties clear the DST checkbox and set the clock to local STANDARD time 3 Configure the T_DST instruction per the instructions below 4 Set the Cfg_EnableDST bit to 1 The clock is switched to DST based on the rules entered if DST is currently in effect for your location Configuration Cfg_FwdMo Month specified in rule for date to spring forward 1 12 Cfg_FwdOccur Occurrence of day of week to spring forward 1 Ist 2 2nd 5 last Cfg_FwdDoW Day of the week to spring forward 0 Sun 6 Sat Cfg_FwdDoM Day of month for spring forward if on a fixed date 1 31 Cfg_FwdDoWBefore Day of the week BEFORE the first last day of week or date 0 Sun 6 Sat Cfg_FwdHr Hour LOCAL to spring forward 0 23 Cfg_FwdMin Minute LOCAL to spring forward 0 59 Cfg_FwdFixedDate 1 Spring forward on fixed date 0 on occurrence of day of week Cfg_FwdUseBefore 1 Spring forward on day of week before date or day of week Cfg_BackMo Month specified in rule for date to fall back 1 12 Cfg_BackOccur Occurrence of
229. r defined type DateTime external to this Add On Instruction definition DateTime is defined as the following Yr DINT year Mo DINT month Da DINT day Hr DINT hour Min DINT minute Sec DINT second uSec DINT microsecond Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 T_LEQ_1_0 01_AOI L5X T_LES_1_0 01_AOI L5X 173 AppendixD Additional Add On Instructions Name Short Description Long Description File Name T_LIM DateTime Limit Test This instruction compares a Date and Time of Day or amount of time with a High Limit T_LIM_1_0 00_AOI L5X Date Time or amount of time and a Low Limit Date Time or amount of time There are two cases e normal case Low Limit lt High Limit e circular case Low Limit gt High Limit In the normal case EnableOut and Out are set if Low Limit lt DateTime lt High Limit In the circular case EnableOut and Out are set if DateTime gt Low Limit OR DateTime lt High Limit remember High Limit lt Low Limit This instruction can be used in Ladder Diagram Structured Text or Function Block Routines just like the LIM instruction is used for integers and floating point numbers However because it has InOut Parameters tag references to user defined types it is not left justified on ladder rungs On a False rung in LD or in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 IMPORTANT This i
230. r the loop Setpoint Normal Operation of Devices Value Code A Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Maintenance Tab Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance tab to make adjustments to device parameters troubleshoot and temporarily work around device problems and disable the device for routine maintenance The Maintenance tab is divided into four tabs Maintenance Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the Maintenance tab shows the following information e Source of the setpoint by animation of the data path and the transfer points e Actual loop setpoint after selection and clamping e Loop process variable PV cc ole ela 2 3 4 Operator Setpoint jj gt fF 400 P 0 00 gt Loop PY _ amp Fy 0 17 Setpoint Maximum SP Limits aoe 100 00 and Minimum 0 00 Allow SP to track PY in manual mode SP Actual Setpoint The following table shows the functions of page 1 of the Maintenance tab Table 46 CC Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description Operator Setpoint Type the Operator setpoint Normal Operation SPOper of Devices Code A Setpoint Limits Type the maximum limit for the setpoint Configurationand SPHLimit Tunin Type the minimum limit for the setpoint he anaes SPLLimit Code D Allow SP to track PV Click to Set true to enable CV Tracking Equipment
231. rName TaqName When naming controller scoped tags use the program name that first makes a reference to the controller scoped tag If this option is not checked then the controller scoped alarm name is ControllerName TagName Ifthis option is checked then the alarm name is ControllerName ProgramName TagName where ProgramName is the first program found in the ACD file that references the controller scoped tag note that the tag name delimiter used is based on the above options selected Select AE XML Import File Name C Users LabusernDesktop FTAE Importxml end to existing file and update existing tags Select FT View File Format Version Version 6 Version 7 Version 8 or Higher Overwrite existing file NOTE You should export your existing AE alarm server database to an XML file include all messages in the export if you want to keep the existing AE tags and messages Select that XML file as the file name you wantto exportto and selectthe Append option After the XML file is updated you should import that file to your AE alarm server and use the update existing tags option 1 In the top half of the screen click each tab to view and select desired options 2 In the lower half of the screen click Save As to browse to the path of the import file 3 Click Next An Export window appears 4 Click OK to build the XML import file Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014
232. rary objects such as Logix Diagnostic objects and Steam Table instructions that are not to be customized These objects typically are not operator facing and have functionality that must be fixed to provide the desired functionality e Customization could inhibit your ability to leverage the library documentation or standard training based on the library e The library is supported through Rockwell Automation Technical Support as long as the Add On Instructions have not been modified from the original deployment If customized the library is supported similar to any other application code Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 111 Chapter3 Common Configuration Considerations Notes 112 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Chapter 4 Use the Library This chapter shows how to use Library Add On Instructions global objects and faceplates to build your control application FactoryTalk View SE software provides visualization of instruments connected to the network interface Global objects display elements provide touch areas from which faceplates are launched link tag names to the faceplates and display the process variables and alarms The procedures in this section require that you have installed global objects ggfx file types See Import Visualization Files on page 72 for installation details if necessary Create a Libra ry Instance Follow these steps to
233. re part of the software installation package converts a controller ACD file to an XML file so the Alarm Builder software can read the data to create the alarm tags There are additional resources available that Quick Start Guide provide detailed information Create Alarm Import Files for configuring alarm tags About Edit Tag Data and data types From the Help menu on the PlantPAx Software License Alarm Definitions Builder Tool Alarms Builder and Tag Data Edit Tool window click Contents to access these documents e Create Alarm Import Files e Edit Tag Data e Alarm Definitions Builder Tool Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 127 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool Build AE Alarms 128 The diagram outlines the procedures for creating Factorylalk View SE software alarms The procedures in this section are in the same order as the headings in the diagram Figure 7 Alarm Builder AE Workflow SELECT CONTROLLER 3 DEFINE HMI ALARM SERVER 4 PREPARE XML IMPORT FILE QUICK BUILD SELECT amp ORGANIZE ALARM TAGS A ORGANIZE AE TAGS INTO FOLDERS ASSOCIATE ALARMS TO HMI B ASSOCIATE ALARM TAGS TO HMI DISPLAYS C SYNCHRONIZE AE amp LOGIX TAGS STNCHRONIZE AE LOG IX TAGS REVIEW AE TAG CONFIG D REVIEW INDIVIDUAL AE ALARM TAG CONFIG E REVIEW EDIT XML FILE BUILD OPTIONS 5 SAVE XMLIMPORT FILE Rockwe
234. ries will be imported INFORMATION 07 05 01 Finished Pre Import Phase INFORMATION Tag Import file C Users Publici Documents RSview Enterprise MEVHMI Projec INFORMATION Tags Successful Creations 7 INFORMATION 07 05 02 Database import complete Check Import log File Cs UsersiLabuser 4opDatalLocall TempiMero Template PlantP4xLib 3004 06 10 Click the X in the upper right corner of the window to close the window and complete the import Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 81 Chapter2 How to Install the Library Notes 82 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Library Programming Considerations The table describes the topics in this chapter Topic Library Programming Considerations Mode Configuration Alarm Considerations Alarm with FactoryTalk Alarm and Event Server Alarm with FactoryTalk View ME Software Security Configuration Global Object Configuration Maintain Library Releases Customize the Library and Structured Text languages Figure 3 Ladder Diagram Single Speed Motor Input Signal RUN feedback from motor Local 3 Data 6 M101 Inp_RunFdbk JE Single Speed Motor Motor Single Speed Motor P_Motor M101 C Inp_RunFdbk 0e Inp_PermOK 1e Inp_NBPermOK 1e inp _IntikOK 1e Inp_NBINntIkOK COut_Run COut_Start fs st op Single Speed Motor 1 Run Motor O Stop Motor Rockwe
235. roller in RSLogix 5000 Export Tags to Excel OPC Read Write Workbook Configure Trend Definitions Save non encrypted AQI Definitions to LagixView AOI Definitions File Select or Change Associated FactoryTalk View HMI gt Browse for HMI Application use if local or remote FactoryTalk View installed wally Enter HMI Information Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 133 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool The Select HMI Project dialog box appears Select Seedy al View Product Type Stand Alone A Edition SE Distributed Machine Edition ME Trouble Shooting Missing HMI Servers or Data Server Shortcuts Select Application Name PlantPAxLibrary3 Select HMI Server PlantPAxLibrary3 Selected HMI Server PlantPAxLibrary3 CLX_ Sot ee Backplane ControlLogix 59xx Emulator 1 tagfile j ServerName IRSLinx Enterprise Mosquito device Backplane ControlLogix 55xx Emulator 1 tagfile ServerName RSLinx Enterprise Selected Data Server Device Shortcut CLX Slot Selected Data Server Name RSLinx Enterprise 3 Click the network scope Distributed product type 4 From the Select Application Name pull down menu choose the application name 5 Click a data server device shortcut name and click OK The associated HMI application with its valid information appears under the selected controller File Wiew Tools Windows Help
236. rror o Bila Proportional 0 5000 Integral 25000 1 hMinutes Derivative 0 0000 Minutes Feed Forward The following table shows the functions of page 2 of the Maintenance tab Table 74 PIDE Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description Deadband Value Type a value for the zero crossing Configurationand ZCDeadband deadband range Tuning Type zero to disable the zero crossing Maintenance deadband checking Code D PV EU Maximum Type a value for the maximum and Engineering e PVEUMax and Minimum minimum scaled values for PV Configuration PVEUMin Code E Gains Type in a value for Configurationand PGain Proportional Proportional gain Tuning e Gain Integral Integral gain Maintenance e DGain a ae Code D Derivative Derivative gain 238 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Maintenance Tab Page 3 Page 3 of the PIDE Maintenance tab shows the following information e CV when in the Program Manual mode e CV Hand feedback value when in Hand mode and HandFBFault is clear e CV initial value e Scaled CV output Built In PIDE A aja Override Program CV Value _peffJ ood 0 00 Hand Feedback 0 00 C Init value CY Limits 0 00 High and Low CV Limits lt lt F 2 0 00 CV Rate of Change Limit ja gt 0 00 CY EU Min hlax 100 00 0 00 Scaled CV Output The following table shows t
237. rs tag references to user defined types it is not left justified on ladder rungs On a False rung in LD or in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 IMPORTANT This instruction is dependent on the user defined type DateTime external to this Add On Instruction definition DateTime is defined as the following Yr DINT year Mo DINT month Da DINT day Hr DINT hour Min DINT minute Sec DINT second uSec DINT microsecond Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 171 AppendixD Additional Add On Instructions Name Short Description Long Description File Name T_GEQ DateTime gt DateTime This instruction compares two Date and Time of Day DateTime variables T_GEQ_1_0 01_AOI L5X If DT1 is greater than after or equal to DT2 EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 This instruction can be used in Ladder Diagram Structured Text or Function Block Routines just like the GEQ instruction is used for integers and floating point numbers However because it has InOut Parameters tag references to user defined types it is not left justified on ladder rungs On a False rung in LD or in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 IMPORTANT This instruction is dependent on the user defined type DateTime external to this Add On Instruction definition DateTime is defi
238. ry or death Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment PPE Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment PPE gt gt gt Allen Bradley ControlLogix E1 E3 E300 FactoryTalk Logix5000 PlantPAx PowerFlex Rockwell Automation Rockwell Software RSLinx RSLogix and SMC are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes This manual is updated throughout for Version 3 1 of the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects Changes for this revision are marked by change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph i New and Updated This table contains the changes made to this revision Information Topic Page New categories for the Library object overviews 14 Motor Control overviews have new objects for PowerFlex drive P_PF52x 27 28 29 30 31 Smart Motor Controllers P_SMC50 P_ SMCFlex and Overload Relays P_E1Plus P_E30vid P_E3000vid New Steam Table object overviews P_Steam_hs P_Steam_ph P_Steam_ps 39 Graphics for Built in Instructions Autotune CC IMC MMC PIDE RMPS TOT 46 47 48 49 added to overviews Alarm types table updated for new categories and objects 88 Status and Control bits for Suppress and Disabled alarms are separate for 92 version 3 1 for import behavior Alarm severity range added for version 3 1 94 Adds FactoryTalk View ME val
239. ryTalk View SE Software View ME Software Description Graphics Displays GFX RA BAS Common Analog Edit Faceplate used for analog input data entry The FactoryTalk View ME faceplates use the native analog input data entry so no file is required RA BAS Built In IMC Autotune Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In IMC Autotune Faceplate The faceplate display used for the Autotune object RA BAS Buit In IMC Autotune Help RA BAS ME Buit In IMC Autotune Help Help information that is accessed from the IMC Autotune Help faceplate RA BAS Built In IMC Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In IMC Faceplate The faceplate display used for the IMC object RA BAS Built In IMC Help RA BAS ME Built In IMC Help Help information that is accessed from the IMC Help faceplate RA BAS Built In IMC RA BAS Built In IMC Quick RA BAS ME Built In IMC RA BAS ME Built In IMC Quick The Quick display used for the IMC object Graphics Global GGFX RA BAS Common E N Objects RA BAS ME Common Cea Objects Common global objects used on all Process Objects Object faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Faceplate Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Faceplate Objects Global objects used on IMC faceplates RA BAS BuiltIn Graphics Librarys RA BAS ME BuiltIn Graphics Librarys Builtin display elements used to build process graphics RA BAS BuiltIn Help Objects RA BAS ME BuiltIn Help Objects BuiltIn global objects used for all BuiltIn help displays Graphics Imag
240. s Trends Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the MMC Trends tab shows the relationship between PV1 PVeu1 and SP1 for the same time period and PV2 PV2eu and SP2 for the same time period MMC oy be i o jo a 2 ap PYeul mm PY 2 PV2eu m SP 1 ma SP 2 100 00 100 00 Blue SP1 and SP2 Green PV1 and PV2 25 00 0 00 0 00 4 09 35 PM 1 11 35 PM 4 10 00 PM 1 12 00 PM maJ Cag Ca nt l D 2 mal Cal Ca EME Ce ee OL Trends Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the MMC Trends tab shows the waveforms for CV1 CV2 and CV3 for the same time period ETEN oje 4 2 m Cy 1 mm CV2 mm CV 3 100 00 75 00 Black CVI _ ______________ gt Blue CV2 Red CV3 n 1 01 37 PM 1 03 37 PM a Ce had La Lae Ce Lee Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 227 Appendix F 228 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Alarms Tab The MMC Alarms tab shows all the available alarms for the device and their current status MM aS y be ok i Ign Alarn High Alarn i PZ Low Alarm Faceplate Help The Faceplate Help page shows the indicators and command buttons that are used by the Modular Multivariable Control MMC function block MMC Faceplate Help x Status Indicators E4 Invalid Configuration x Communication Failure Stale A Auto Loop Mode Mm Manual Loop Mode The CY has reached a high limit The CY has reached a lovy limit an
241. s a percentage of Full Ino_TripReset Out_ResetTrip we iz i Thermal Utilization 0 Load Amps FLA and VRAD de D Motor Current Present percentage of motor thermal Sts_WamBits Inputs utilization MTU A list Sts_TnipBits D J Run Feedback includes the causes of the last Sts Inp2 f J Bad Vibes five overload trips The oe Outputs Sts_MotorCurr D Starter Energized eda Lae a i Sts _LocalResetReqd a imited capability for remote Sts_Er f reset of overload trips gts Tie This instruction is provided as a Sts_ OFault f rung import for installation Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM049 E3 E3Plus Overload Relay P_E30vid Global Object Faceplate The P_E30vid instruction controls and monitors the ro ioy FLA P_E3Ovid Motor Overload Relay E following overload relays 5 yL ha A e 193 592 EC1 193 592 E 2 ae Amps 0 0 193 592 EG3 Add On Instruction 7 e 193 592 EG The instruction monitors the an oe T relays by using a built in Inp 2 DeviceNet interface or by using Pas one JAE a 2100 ENET EtherNet IP Ba age ete z Run Feedback interface The instruction Sts TripBits P Disconnect Closed reports warning and trip conditions displays motor current as a percentage of Full Load Amps FLA and provides commands to initiate a remote trip and a remote trip reset This instruction is provided as a rung import for installation Outputs Star
242. s a single process variable by manipulating as many as three different control variables As an option any of the three outputs can be used as an input to create feed forward action in the control variable The CC function block calculates the control variables CV1 CV2 and CV3 in the Auto mode based on the PV SP deviation internal models and tuning Visualization Files The following files are required to use the CC object and can be downloaded from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support pcdc page IMPORTANT Files must be imported in the following order image files then global object files and then graphic files This order is required to properly configure the visualization files Table 43 CC Visualization File Types Application Type FileType FactoryTalk View SE Software View ME Software Description Graphics Displays GFX RA BAS Common Analog Edit Faceplate used for analog input data entry The FactoryTalk View ME faceplates use the native analog input data entry so no file is required RA BAS Built In CC Autotune Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In CC Autotune Faceplate The faceplate display used for the Autotune object RA BAS Built In CC Autotune Help RA BAS ME Built In CC Autotune Help Help information that is accessed from the CC Autotune Help faceplate RA BAS Built In CC Faceplate RA BAS ME Built In CC Faceplate The face
243. s less than before or equal to DT2 EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 This instruction can be used in Ladder Diagram Structured Text or Function Block Routines just like the LEQ instruction is used for integers and floating point numbers However because it has InOut Parameters tag references to user defined types it is not left justified on ladder rungs On a False rung in LD or in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 IMPORTANT This instruction is dependent on the user defined type DateTime external to this Add On Instruction definition DateTime is defined as the following Yr DINT year Mo DINT month Da DINT day Hr DINT hour Min DINT minute Sec DINT second uSec DINT microsecond This instruction compares two Date and Time of Day DateTime variables If DT1 is less than before DT2 EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 This instruction can be used in Ladder Diagram Structured Text or Function Block Routines just like the LES instruction is used for integers and floating point numbers However because it has InOut Parameters tag references to user defined types it is not left justified on ladder rungs On a False rung in LD or in FBD with Enableln cleared to 0 Out is cleared to 0 IMPORTANT This instruction is dependent on the use
244. s or any niacin cae anes a other operator interface is only Flow Velocity Other ae OF eee supported In CV Step Size 0 0 PY Change Limit 0 00 A Paral l e ockhasan function block ne e call utotune lag typ programming Proportional antes Parar PIDE_AUTOTUNE that you iti Slow 0000 ooo 0 0000 IEMs specify for those PIDE blocks Itis not q 3m that you want to autotune available in Medium Q 0000 O 0000 o 0000 SLT relay ladder or Fast 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Ean 1 00000 Click the links to access structured text ee osc can o e faceplates in Appendix F programming e Reference Manual publication 1756 RM006 Advanced Process Control Function Blocks CC IMC MMC The three advanced process control APC function blocks can be used in place of PID instructions for loops with long dead times and interacting loops Table 12 APC Function Blocks Process Object Description Object Elements Coordinated Control CC Faceplate The Coordinated Control CC function block controls a single j process variable by manipulating as many as three woo different control variables As Emer mo inw an option any of the three o iis ee Pv M outputs can be used as an input M x i y Taz to create feed forward action in DE oo MOR oy et AG the control variable ME om y gt a The CC function block calculates o a E sate 0m the control variables CV1 CV2 o om MH wo nd CV3 in the Auto mode ee the PV P fain
245. s to Logix tags to open the HMI via a user configurable macro e Review tag configuration before adding the tags to the alarms import file A Organize AE Tags into Folders You can select individual Logix tags to use for building the alarm tags The selected tags also can be organized in user defined folders This lets you use the alarm summary to filter alarms based on the folder names in the Alarm Class string Follow these steps 1 Right click the alarm server name and from the pull down menu choose Build Factorylalk A amp E Alarms XML Import File gt Select Organize tags and Displays Review Options HMI Alarm Servers se WAlarmSemerlPat gl Proce Change Controllers Associated with Alarm Server Rename Alarm Server Remove Alarm Server Build FactoryTalk A amp E Alarms XML Import File gt Quick Build fuse default options Build Parameter File for AE Alarm Summary Filter Tree Select Organize Tags and Displays Review Options Build Parameter File for AE Alarm Summary Filter Tree with Alarm Tag Names Ls Compare Logix Tags with AE Configuration Build ME Alarms XML Import File b Expand All Collapse All A message box precedes each dialog box Click OK to perform the task or click Skip to continue to the next dialog box Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B If OK is clicked the Select and Organize Alarm
246. s_Err m l Sts Hade ETTI n MEOE Fame ay Sts_Maint P 61 05 0 LO 100 Sts_Ovrd 61 05 P Sts_Prog E H 100 eee FIC_1305 Global Object Faceplate Analog Fanout Y AL Home Operator g Operator A CV CV1 Analog Fanout x Add On Instruction 50 00 Initialize 0 00 z 40 00 50 00 A Analog Fanout g Inp_cv Out_CV1 CV CV5 cvs g Inp_CV1InitVal Out_CV2 Inp_CV2Init al Out_CV3 Inp_CV3lnit al Out_Cv4 z 0 00 Initialize 40 00 p 80 00 Inp_CV4lnit al Out_CV 5 w 0 00 w Inp_CV5lnital Out_CV6 D Inp_CY6lnitval Out_Cv7 D q Inp_CW7InitVal Out_Cv8 D g Inp_CY8lnitVal Out_CVInitval D CV3 CV6 aj Inp_C 1InitReq Out_CVinitReq 5 Inp_CY2lnitReq Val_InpCV f AE LAS LEAN LAN a Inp_CV3lnitReq Val_CV 0 00 20 00 x S a Inp_CV4lnitReq Sts_Err T Input CV 40 00 E Inp_C V5InitReq Sts_Maint E aj Inp_CVblnitReq Sts_Prog 9 Bee Inp_CV InitReq Sts_Oper A oan Inp_C 8lnitReq P_Fanout Global Object Faceplate P_HiLoSel High or Low Selector HightLlow Select 0 00 Al T L 5 Input Cy 1 High Select CV 2 Input CY 2 0 CV3 Input CY 3 0 Add On Instruction CVA Input CW 4 4 CV5 Input CY5 0 CV6 Input CV 6 08 P_HiLoSel A High or Low Select S Out_cv b i Out_CV1Prev D 0 4095 Out_UseCV1Prev E Out_CV2Prev D 0 00 Out_UseCV2Prev Val_Selected D Q Inp_C init al Inp_C InitReg Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002
247. se Autotune Values Copy the selected H tuning values into the current IMC Gain Time Constant Dead Time and Response Time Constant Instructions 1 Select Process Type and Noise Level 2 Enter the Approximation Factor if using Integrating Process Type 3 Enter CY Step size PW Tuning Limit and Autotune Timeout 4 Press the Autotune Start Button 5 Once the Autotune sequence completes check for and correct any errors before continuing 6 Select the desired Response Speed f Press the Use Autotune Values button to copy the selected values into the current IMC Tags Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 217 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Modular Multivariable The Modular Multivariable Control MMC function block controls two process variables to their setpoints manipulating up to three control variables Control MMC The MMC function block calculates the control variables CV1 CV2 and CV3 in the Auto mode based on the PV1 SP1 PV2 SP2 deviation internal model and tuning The MMC function block is a flexible model based algorithm that can be used in two basic configuration modes e Three control variables used to control two interacting process variables e Two control variables used to control two interacting process variables Visualization Files The following files are required to use the IMC Object and can be downloaded from the Pro
248. serenetcedet E EA 260 DPC SAO ct Coane ate es peta beeen eet eae tae 261 Faceplate HEP virre ea E TA OEE 262 Ee E E E E A Te 263 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Additional Resources Preface The purpose of this manual is to facilitate the use of the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects and associated productivity tools The library consists of predefined application code for Logix controllers and graphics for FactoryIalk View software The combination of programming logic and HMI visualization files lets you accelerate control project development by starting from a proven tested and documented set of code The instructions provide common process objects for controlling and interacting with motors valves pumps and numerous other devices See page 14 for links to the individual reference manuals for objects that comprise the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation Resource PlantPAx Process Automation System Selection Guide publication PROCES SG001 PlantPAx Process Automation System Reference Manual publication PROCES RMO001 PlantPAx System Application Templates Quick Start publication PROCES 0S001 FactoryTalk View SE Edition User Manual publication VIEWSE UM006 FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User Manual publication VIEWME UM004 Rockwell Automation Library o
249. sion can have differences in functionality that requires adjustment of your application code written around the library instruction instances e There can be differences in the look and feel that requires an update of operator training and manuals e Ifyou have made any customizations they likely need to be repeated on the new release of the library after it is loaded It is important that these considerations are weighed properly against the benefits you gained from the new Library release The release of the Library typically includes documentation on how to upgrade from the previous Major Minor release 110 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 Customize the Library The Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects can be customized for project or customer specific reasons However we recommend that you consider the following e Weigh the value of the customization against the value of using the library as issued For example you must document any customization so it can be reapplied if necessary on top of a subsequent maintenance release e Rockwell Automation provides a varied schedule of maintenance releases for the library If the library object has not been altered updating the latest maintenance release can be done more easily If customized the customization has to be reapplied manually on subsequent releases IMPORTANT There are some lib
250. sired segment s Tuning Maintenance the desired segment s Soak Value Type a value for Soak Value for the desired SoakValue segment s Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 251 Appendix F 252 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Engineering Tab The Engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges options for device and I O setup displayed text and faceplate to faceplate navigation settings for initial system commissioning or later system changes Ramp Soak f E i al AF i al Number of RampSoak Segments 10 Continuously repeat the ramprsoak profile Place the ramp soak in Operator Manual or Program Hold mode after initialization Reset program control values after processing Jf Ramp value parameters are entered as a time In minutes ta reach the soak temperature suspend ramping ifthe PY differs fram the Output by more than RampDeadband Ramp Deadband 3 00 Clear the soak timer if the PY differs from the Output by more than soakDeadband Soak Deadband 2 50 The following table shows the functions of the RMPS engineering tab Table 83 RMPS Engineering Tab Description Number of Ramp Engineering NumberOfSegs Soak Segments Configuration Code E Continuously repeat Check to set for cyclic action CyclicSingle the ramp soak Clear this checkbox to set for single action profile yclic action continuously repeats
251. splays in an application When changes are made to the original base object the instantiated copies reference objects are automatically updated Use of global objects in conjunction with tag structures in the ControlLogix system aid consistency and save engineering time IMC Display Elements Descriptions Display Element Description Modular Multivariable Control object with two process variables and three control variables Mihi 0 21 Peu fy 0 20 Peu Do0 i Do0 i Do0 M Modular Multivariable Control object with two process ulas variables two setpoints and three control variables 0 09 Peut fry 0 13 Peul 35 00 Peut 32 00 Peut Do0 i Do0 i Do0 i Modular Multivariable Control object with two process MMi variables and two setpoints 0 04 Peu fy 0 22 PYeut 35 00 Peut 32 00 Peut Operator Tab The faceplate initially opens to the Operator Home tab From here an operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it is in Operator mode The MMC Operator tab shows the following information e Requested modes indicator for CV1 CV2 and CV3 e Current mode indicator for CV1 CV2 and CV3 e Current process variable PV1 and PV2 and bar graph e Current CV CV1 CV2 and CV3 e Program CV CV1 CV2 and CV3 and bar graph for each e Current setpoint for PV1 and PV2 e Program setpoint for PV1 and PV2 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 2
252. ss Variable is not equal to the Target Process Variable and the Gate input is Enabled I 0 Processing objects including P_Din Raised if the valve has and is using Open and Closed feedback an attemptis Valve objects including made to open or close the valve and the valve position feedback indicates P_ValveHO the valve moved from its original position but did not reach its target e P_ValveMO position within the configured time e P_ValveSO The Overload Trip alarm occurs when the overload has tripped Motor objects including P_E1PlusE P_E3000vid P_E30vld Motor and Valve objects including P_MotorHO e P_ValveHO Raised if using the optional trip function when an attempt is made to trip the motor valve and the feedbacks do not indicate that the trip state e was achieved Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 1 0 Processing and Regulatory Control objects including Common Configuration Considerations Table 34 P_Alarm Types by Library Objects Alarm Type UnderTol Warn ZeroFault Alarm Description Library Objects Raised when the tolerance check is performed if the quantity delivered falls Procedural Control objects including short of the setpoint by more than the low tolerance limit e P_DoseFM P_DoseWS The Pending Trip Warning alarm is triggered when a motor overload Motor objects including condition is occurring and an overload trip is imminent P_E1PlusE P_E3000
253. ssigned gt lt AllTriggers gt Mix PS0 Motor Alm F 2 From the Trigger pull down menu choose the Trigger tag that you created Our example is the Mix P50_Motor 3 In the Trigger Value column type 1 102 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 4 In the Message column type the message to appear with the alarm Alarm Messages Trigger value Mix PSO Motor 4lmn FailToStart Main Line Uniti P50 Motor Fail to Start sUmassigned gt o l 5 Click OK Configure Notification Options Follow these steps for audio or visuals when an alarm occurs 1 On the Message tab of the Alarm Setup dialog box click and drag the bottom display bar to the right to show the rest of the columns for the alarm message a a Eri Alarm Setup MEO Sarnples Lib 30077 oo Epi xmi Messages Alarm Messages Main Line Unit 1 250 Motor Fail To Start V O Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 103 Chapter 3 104 Common Configuration Considerations 2 Complete the notification options Field Display Audio Print Message to Tag Background and Foreground Description Leave the check in the checkbox so you see the alarm display when there is an alarm occurrence Check the checkbox if you want a sound to play from the HMI terminal s speakers when an alarm occurs Check the checkbox if you have a pr
254. stExecT Val_MaxExecT Val_OverlapC Val_WatchdogT Sts_Tasklnhibited Sts_Err Sts_OverPlan b Overview Faceplate Task Task_4_50ms Monitor 4 Within Plan ees Execution 40 00 ms ime 4Max Execution E Time 53 11 ms Last Execution DTE E Time Task Overlap LA Count z 110 0 Task Configuration Task Period 50 00 ms Priority 1 15 lower value is higher priority Watchdog Time 150 00 ms Task Running Chapter 1 See Long Integer and Time Instructions on page 165 to complete math and time functions with library objects See the Time and Date Instructions on page 169 to complete date and time functions with library objects Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 45 Chapter1 Overview Graphics for Built in The faceplates in this section are designed so the built in Logix5000 controller Instructions instructions can interface with the Process Library Add On Instructions Table 11 Built in Autotuner Process Object Description Object Elements Built in Autotuner Global Object Faceplate The RSLogix 5000 PIDE autotuner provides an open loop autotuner that is Ay x built into the PIDE instruction The autotune function is Tag Ready cf Ready a accessed from the PIDE faceplate eg Process Type Autotune Built In PIDE Temperature Level Integrating You can autotune from eautot as ae ee essure osition n Integratin PanelView terminal
255. state before declaring a failure I 0 Processing objects including P_DOut Warning if only one of the two PV inputs is good quality Raised if one input s quality is bad or uncertain I 0 Processing objects including P_AlnDual Triggered when the device is commanded On but device feedback does not confirm the device is On within the configured time The OnFail Status Alarm has a configurable time Cfg_OnFailT so the device feedbacks can show the device reached the On state before declaring a failure I 0 Processing objects including P_DOut Raised when tolerance check is performed if the quantity delivered exceeds Procedural Control objects including the setpoint by more than the high tolerance limit e P_DoseFM e P_DoseWS The device was commanded to a new position but the position feedbacks failed to show the device reached the target position within the configured time allowed Cfg_PosChkT For target positions other than Position 1 the device can be configured to retry the move a configurable number of times returning to Position 1 for each try before declaring a Position Fail The device can be configured to either alarm only or to shed to a de energized state on a Position Fail Valve objects including P_nPos Raised if the scale is tared and then drifts away from the tare weight before the start flow command is received Procedural Control objects including P_DoseWS Activated when the Input Proce
256. suppressed and acknowledged status updates from the FactoryTalk Alarms and Events Alarm Summary and Alarm Status Explorer dialog boxes 1 From the Alarms Properties dialog box click the Status Tags tab The Status Tags dialog box appears Digital Status Tags Control Tags Disabled Tag j Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 9 eum Suppressed Tag i Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 6 mas In Alarm Tag ms Acknowledged Tag Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 1 amm Shelved Tag u Mix PSO_Motor FaiTostart comAE 3 0 m Lid JL JL gt JEL Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 95 Chapter3 Common Configuration Considerations 2 Complete the status tag dialog boxes Table 35 Status Tag Dialog Box Field Description Disabled Tag Type Path Object Alarm Com_AE 9 for the disabled tag Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 9 Suppressed Tag Type PathObject Alarm Com_AE 6 for the suppressed tag Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 6 In Alarm Tag Leave blank Acknowledged Tag Type Path Object Alarm COM_AE 1 for the acknowledged tag Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 1 Shelved Tag Type Path Object Alarm COM_AE 3 for the shelved tag Our example is Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 3 IMPORTANT Even though Com_AE is a Local Tag in the Add On definition it s configured to be writable Read Write not Read Only so the
257. t it is created Follow these steps to create associations 1 From the Process Library Customization Tool File menu click Open Graphic XML File The Open Graphics XML Files dialog box appears 2 Select an object from the tree on the left and its colors appear in the center of the screen 3 To associate a color from the palette select the palette color and drag it to the text box next to the color display box Once all colors for an object are associated with the color palette a check appears next to the object in the tree Colors that are actually used for the object only are displayed For example if an object is configured as Transparent its background color does not show up in the utility Also instances of global objects from display files do not appear in the object tree The tree can be configured to show instances of global objects but the objects do not have any color instances because their colors are controlled by their parent global objects 4 Copy and paste functions have been included to allow quick creation of color associations To use these functions right click on the graphic object in the tree on the left and a menu appears e Copy Color Associations Use this function to copy the color associations for the object If the object is a group the color configurations for all group members is copied e Paste Color Associations this Object only Use this function to paste the previously copied color
258. t Controllers for Building Alarms Tags in HMI Alarm Server 4 ProcessObjects_3_1_00 HMI App PlantPAxLibrary3 HMI Server PlantPAxLibrar ull j Uncheck All Check All onc 4 Check the checkbox to select the controller that you added and click OK The alarm server name appears under HMI Alarm Servers in the configuration tree Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 135 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool 4 Prepare XML Import File You have two options to build the XML import file Quick Build Custom Build We recommend that you use the Quick Build default options below to create the XML import files For optional tag configurations as shown in the flow chart see Custom Build on page 138 Quick Build The AE alarms import file uses the following default settings Discrete alarms are only added All Logix tags in the alarm server controllers with alarm definitions are used AE tag s AckRequired parameter is set to True AE tag s Severity value is set from the Logix tag s alarm severity value See Table 38 on page 131 for mapping values AE tag is added to the XML file only if the Logix tag s HasAlarm value is 1 Logix tags Cfg_Desc local string tag value is added to the AE tag s alarm message AE tag name equals the Logix tag name and alarm element name For example T1123_Alm_HiHi AE tag s View command is config
259. t Wizard Select Operation dialog box appears Alarm Import Export Wizard Select Operation 2 Click Import alarm configuration into application and click Next Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B We recommend that you make a backup until you are familiar with the import process Alarm Import Export Wizard Create Backup 3 Type a name for the backup file and click Next 4 Click Browse on the alarm wizard dialog box to find where you saved the file 5 Select the alarm configuration file and click Open Choose alarm configuration file to import Fe hy F m I Documents D Ej k t m mj hw Documents ai bio Computer a ad p LEA Places Ci alobal Objects Ei SlobalConn C Images O RecipePlus Startup tas ieee 224 Alarms test 2nil Alarms xml Logis view _MIE_Process xml ME_Process_alarms xml 2 Information Local EDM Alaris Macros PAR jProjeckSethngs ME _Process_alarms sml Alarm Files ml Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 e 157 AppendixB Alarms Builder Tool The Alarm Import Export Wizard Select File dialog box appears Alarm Import Export Wizard Select File xl C Documents and Settings All Users Documents ASView Enterprise ME HMI projects ME_Process ME_Process_alarms xml 6 Click Finish 158 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCE
260. t a Number 1 QNaN L_INC Increment 64 bit This instruction increments the input 64 bit integer returning its value plus 1 L_INC_1_0 00_AOI L5X L_LEQ Less Than or Equal 64 bit This instruction compares two LINT 64 bit signed integer variables L_ LEQ 1 0 01 AOI L5X If Inp_A is less than or equal to Inp_B EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 L_LES Less Than 64 bit This instruction compares two LINT 64 bit signed integer variables L_LES 10 01 AOI L5X If Inp_A is less than Inp_B EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 L_LIM Limit Test Circular 64 bit This instruction compares a 64 bit Input with a 64 bit High Limit and a 64 bit Low Limit L_LIM_1_0 01_AOI L5X There are two cases a normal case Low Limit lt High Limit and a circular case Low Limit gt High Limit In the normal case EnableOut and Out are set if Low Limit lt Input lt High Limit In the circular case EnableOut and Out are set if Input gt Low Limit OR Input lt HighLimit remember High Limit lt Low Limit This instruction can be used in Ladder Diagram Structured Text or Function Block Routines just like the LIM instruction is used for 32 bit integers and floating point numbers However because it has InOut Parameters references to tags of LINT type it is not left justified on ladder rungs On a False rung
261. t conditions Add On Instruction Stopped This instruction is designed to work with the PowerFlex 753 drive and a 20 COMM E Ethernet communication module The instruction displays drive information including faults alarms and general status This instruction is provided as a rung import for installation Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM044 P_PF753 PowerFlex 753 Drive np Out Ref_FaultCodeList np_FwdPermOK np_FwdNBPermOkK np_RevPermOK np_RevNBPermOK np_IntlkOK np_NBintIkkOK np_Hand np_Ovrd np_OvrdCmd np_Reset Sts_Oper Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Feedback Hz Reference Hz gt m z000 30 00 Drive Ready Forward 27 Chapter 1 28 Overview Table 6 Motors Process Object Description Object Elements PowerFlex 755 Drive P_PF755 Global Object The P_PF755 instruction operates one variable speed motor by using a drive AC variable frequency or DC ina variety of modes monitoring for fault conditions Add On Instruction This instruction is designed to on work with a PowerFlex 755 Power lex 785 Drive variable frequency AC drive that is communicating with the controller over an EtherNet IP network The instruction also works with a PowerFlex 753 drive with an enhanced Ethernet card This instruction is provided as a rung import for installation o Inp_Reset Click the l
262. t when to move toward P Neikor PRE Le wee EH fully closed and when to move VERTS OHE Open toward fully open e p Position Feedback 59 87 Sie or z Increase Change Limit 0 00 0 00 Click the link to access the Sts_Owd Decrease Change Limit 0 00 0 00 Reference Manual SYSLIB RM034 Hand operated Valve P_ValveHO Global Object Faceplate Station Inlet alye Hand Oper Alay ok Home Operator D lt The P_ValveHO instruction monitors a hand locally operated valve and displays its current state The valve can be solenoid operated motor operated or manually actuated The open P_ValveHO instruction cannot fully control the valve but it Q can optionally provide an Add On output to include in a trip PU GNU MON circuit to trip the valve to a ae alve default fail state Hand Operated Valve a Inp_OpenLs Inp_ClosedLS Sts_Closed 9 Click the link to access the E Inp_IntikOK Sts_Opened f m Inp_NBIntIkOK Sts_Moving P Reference Manual a Inp_Reset Sts Tripping E Sts_LSFail MyValyeHO SYSLIB RM025 34 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Chapter 1 Table 7 Valves Motor operated Valve P_ValveMO Global Object Faceplate Motor Operated Yalve ty ee ee 19 The P_ValveMO instruction is used to operate open and 3e aok close a motor operated valve i in a variety of modes Disabled Gore ia
263. ta Global objects provide access to faceplates that let you see how the device is operating in real time conditions Alarms and diagnostic information alert operators to monitor specific conditions for well informed business decisions When the predefined logic is coupled to display elements and faceplates in FactoryIalk View Studio software objects are configured in a drag and drop environment as shown in Figure 1 Figure 1 Configuring Library Objects Step 1 Import the Library into the controller project Step 2 Drop and configure the Add On Instruction in your controller code al P_Aln Led Analog Input Step 3 Drop the global object on the HMI display and assign it to an Add On Instruction instance Val Val_InpP Yal_HiHiLim Val_HiLim Val_LoLim Val_LoLoLim sts_Err Step 4 Access small footprint quick faceplates from the global object at runtime for basic operator control Analog Input Analog Input 100 E iy Substitute 10 44 Step 5 Access the full faceplate from the global object at runtime for control maintenance and configuration p al a T HH 90 L 6 m E LL 5 By using a library of consistent elements you improve the operability maintainability and efficiency of your PlantPAx system All objects have a common set of security access levels modes of operation symbols and indicators See Table 2 on page 14
264. te 113 library 113 ME alarm build 151 D device configuration via faceplate 119 diagram AE alarm workflow 128 ME workflow 148 display configuration 107 elements customization 159 elements import 74 quick 109 documentation library usage 13 download library 65 tag configuration 122 elements library 11 F faceplate customization 113 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 263 faceplates autotune 183 built in instructions 183 CC 186 CC autotune 197 customization 159 IMC 201 IMC autotune 214 import 75 MMC 218 RMPS 248 tag configuration 122 TOT 255 FactoryTalk software ME alarms 98 ME tag configuration 77 SE alarms 92 SE text entry 109 files visualization 72 G getting started 65 global objects configuration 107 HMI displays alarm tag association 140 security codes 182 security configuration 181 server associates controller 133 templates 66 images import 72 IMC autotune faceplates 214 faceplates 201 import AE alarm files 144 controller templates 66 display elements 74 faceplates 75 library documents 66 library images 72 ME alarm files 156 visualization files 72 XML files 136 install library 65 internal model control built in instructions 201 L5X file import 66 library benefits for using 12 bookmarks 13 customization 111 113 download 65 elements 11 getting started 65 import Add On Instructions 66 install elements 65 overview 1
265. ter Energized Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM050 30 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 controls and monitors a 193 ECM ETR overload relay by using its built in EtherNet IP interface The instruction reports warning and trip conditions displays motor average current and phase currents and provides commands to initiate a remote trip and a remote trip reset The instruction also supports add on options for the overload relay including its operator interface sensors for voltages and ground fault current and optional discrete I 0 and analog 1 0 modules This instruction is provided as a rung import for installation Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM051 Run Time and Start Counter P_RunTime The P_ Runtime instruction is used to accumulate the total run time and count of starts for a motor or other equipment It is a software implementation of the mechanical hour meter that is often mounted in the door of a Motor Control Center MCC bucket to show total motor run time The run time and number of starts are variables used for maintenance activities Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM010 Inp_ Starting Inp_Running o 00 FLA Add On Instruction P_E3000vid E300 Overload Relay EtherNet IP Inp 2 Ref_TripCodeList Ref_VVarningCodeList z Inp_Trip Out_TripReset Inp_TripReset Out_R
266. the Number of Cfg Items in Column E or any of the other data on the Setup sheet The example below shows 2 instances entered on the Setup sheet because we made 2 modifications in column C in the P_DIN instruction folder E E _ o A B E 1 4 3 L Redun eT 5 4 L_TaskMon 6 5 P_AChan o o O i O Li 6 P_AIN 8 T 9 8 _ PAiInbual o O T 10 9 P_AlnMulti 11 10 _ P_AOut 12 11 _ P_D4sD a 13 13 P_Din 2 14 14 _ P_DoseFM T 15 15 P_Dosews 16 16 P_DOut 17 17 _ P_Fanout 18 18 _ P_HiLoSel 19 19 1 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Online Configuration Tool Appendix A 13 Go back to the Add On Instruction sheet in our example it s P_DIn and click the Read From CLX box near the top of the spreadsheet Cc Read From CLX lt Send To CLX Description Usage Data Type TagName Instance Default Values 0 FSL 101 1 TSH 102 2 14 Click Yes to the overwrite message to populate the row for that instance 15 Make your modifications for example change the strings and click the Send To CLX to send the new configuration to the controller 16 Check the data in the controller and save the project to a new acd file is best Make sure you upload tag values when you save the project TIP If your Add On Instruction instances are in Program scope tags you can get to those as well The TagName syntax is Program lt program_name gt
267. the ratio operator multiplier Value Operator CV Value Type a value for CV CV Slider Move this slider to adjust the loop CV output None PV Slider Move this slider to adjust the loop PV value Maintenance Tab Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance tab to make adjustments to device parameters troubleshoot and temporarily work around device problems and disable the device for routine maintenance The Maintenance tab is divided into four tabs Maintenance Tab Page 1 Page 1 of the Maintenance tab shows the following information e Ratio program multiplier e SP program value scaled in PV units e Current ratio multiplier e Current Setpoint value e SP Cascade value scaled in PV units Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Current Ratio Value Built In PIDE AE Maintenance apa Operator Ratio 100 Ratio fo Program Ratio J 1 00 Fatio Limits Loop Ratio Limits 1 00 High and Low 100 j 1 00 SP Cascade SP Cascade Value p 0 00 X Allow SP to track PY in manual mode Error does not need to cross zera to be in deadband Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F SP Operator Value 0 60 00 P 0 00 SP Program Value Pi 0 51 oP Limits 100 00 y 0 00 se BENE lt Current Setpoint Value The following table shows the functions of page 1 of the PIDE Maintenance tab Table 73 PIDE Mainte
268. tion Failure Stale M Manual Loop Mode Cascade Loop Mode The CY has reached a love limit and cannot control the loop we Low Level Exceeded Loy Low Level Exceeded 5 Low Deviation Exceeded kA Low Low Deviation Exceeded O Device in Operator Mode FE Hana Locany Faceplate Help Page 2 PIDE Faceplate Help 1 2 Commands Program Control Request Request Cascade Loop Mode Available when in Operator Request Manual Loop Mode Available when in Operator Control Control amp Cascade Ratio Enabled x a ones Control Request A Request Auto Loop Mode F Available when in Operator Control Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Appendix F 247 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Ramp Soak RM PS The Ramp Soak RMPS instruction provides for a number of segments of alternating ramp and soak periods Visualization Files The following files are required to use the Built In RMPS Object and can be downloaded from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support pcdc page IMPORTANT Files must be imported in the following order image files then global object files and then graphic files This order is required to properly configure the visualization files Table 79 Ramp Soak RMPS Visualization File Types Application Type FileType FactoryTalk View SE
269. tion is parsed into fields While not required itis recommended Number of Fields 3 that all the controller tag descriptions follow a consistent format Ifyou did not use a format or if you use AOls with local strings for tag description label and engineering units then click OK and use the default settings Edit Field Descriptors optional For example suppose the Description entry for a tag contains the following mela c Ret L aed ellmiter Carriage Return Line Fee MyTagName MyTagqDescl 2 Tab MyTagDesc2 MyEngUnit User Defined MyDrawingNumber The format for the above entry would be Fields used for tag label 1 Number of Fields 5 Fields used for tag description 2 Delimter carriage return line feed Tag label fields 1 Taq description fields 2 3 Fields used for tag engineering unit 3 Tag engineering unit fields 4 In LogixView the tag would contain the following parameter values enter 0 if not used TagLabel MyTagLabel TagDesc MyTaqDescl MyTaqgDesc2 TagEu MyEngUnit Note that TagDesc is combination of the fields specified 2 3 use comma to separate more than one field number 7 Ifthe above conditions do not apply type data into the text boxes to describe the tags and click OK A dialog box appears to update severity values if you are replacing Version 3 0 Add On Instructions with Version 3 1 instructions See Replace Logix Tag Severity Values on page 131 for
270. tomation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Overview Table 18 Alarm Symbols Graphic Symbol Description In alarm and acknowledged A Out of alarm but not acknowledged GS Alarm suppressed by Program logic Alarm disabled by Maintenance Alarm shelved by Operator Table 19 Interlock and Permissive Indicators Graphic Symbol Description Q One or more conditions not OK Non bypassed conditions OK J All conditions OK bypass active All conditions OK Enable checking all interlock and permissive conditions Bypass interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed O oezo Table 20 Level and Deviation Threshold Indicators Graphic Symbol Description High high level exceeded Lad High level exceeded y Low level exceeded E y Low low level exceeded Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Chapter 1 53 Chapter1 Overview Table 20 Level and Deviation Threshold Indicators Graphic Symbol R i ate Description High rate of change exceeded High high deviation exceeded High deviation exceeded Low deviation exceeded Low low deviation exceeded Table 21 PID Symbols Graphic Symbol e Q Description Manual loop mode Auto loop mode Auto loop mode cascade enabled Cascade loop mode PV within SP deadband no control action occurs The CV has reached a high limit and cannot control the
271. topped Add On Instruction P_MotorRev 2 Reversing Motor Inp_FwdRunF dbk Inp_RevRunFdbk Inp_FwdPermOK Inp_FwdNBPermOK E Inp_RevPermOK Inp_RevNBPermOK Inp_IntkkOK Inp_NBIntlkkOK Inp_Reset Out_RunFwd a Out_RunRev amp Sts_Stopped S Sts_StartingFwd 9 Sts_StartingRev Sts_RunningFwd m Sts_RunningRev fa Sts_Stopping 9 Sts_Err amp Sts_Hand a Sts_Maint Sts_Ovrd Sts_Prog Sts_Oper S Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplate Product Transfer Pump aaa ole Home Operator ator al E WA ree m P1_Motor Faceplate Reactor 7 entilation Fan QLA elle ale ITEC P gt gt ROLIGE MyMotor2Spd Faceplate Fresh Leaf Transfer Conveyor ok awe wow It Joa a 25 Overview Table 6 Motors Process Object Description Hand Operated Motor P_MotorHO The P_MotorHO0 instruction monitors a locally controlled hand operated motor The P_MotorHO instruction supports single speed motors two speed motors and reversing motors The instruction also supports an optional trip function and output used to stop the motor Click the link to access the Reference Manual SYSLIB RM022 Discrete 2 3 or 4 state Device P_D4SD The P_D4SD instruction controls and monitors feedback from a discrete 2 state 3 state or 4 state devic
272. totune 00 c cece eee 197 CC Autotune Alarms Tab 00 cece ccc cece nee eeeees 199 CC Autotune Faceplate Help s0065 eee eawiw ae hed ewer haw ee 200 Internal Model Control IMC 0 c ccc cece cece tenes 201 Display Elements 35 02 snniica ptosis Retina peaeansadasaraceneces 202 Operator Dab vies iced eter sbovaqduae tind poseuenbacsean as 202 Maintenance Tabiecd dccawuih ccovtasdbeadeied sewed bowotesades 204 ENgiliccrine TaD torrerien te sadesa cast EOE EAE 209 Enome cring Tab Pace ii06sissciuieieessiuustidasonwieton s 211 Tends NA trope cand ater esna edie od te eats a a eee ta 212 Alarms Paci anton teeta e Coote ene coun NEA 213 FACS pte de gt enetusneeracinad waperwinn eas 214 Internal Model Control IMC Autotune 000 08 214 IMC Aurotune Faceplate Help ee cyveusas nat eetieeeteasgy sudan 217 Modular Multivariable Control MMC 0ce cece ee eees 218 Visualization Files u 2 2csdiuebesndccteetade cache kuuesaeeeecie 218 Display Ekmen ersen aat imei aes neuen aeeis sacs 219 Operator aby 2455 idee ets ce ccda teeus sade ttn ace eee 219 Maintenance Tab 0 cece ec cc eee eee eee eeeeees 221 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 7 Table of Contents Index Maintenance Tab Pate 2vrecsouceoutinaas taney ETETE 223 ENeiNcerine Fab iasdsrntarwinendos coches ent lwamsnieeaaneds 224 Eineinecring TaD Page 2 avis bah Sete ED 226 MSEC INGE AO teats hkl Act
273. ue for CV1 CV2 or CV3 internal model time constant Constant in seconds Current Dead Time Type a value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 internal model deadtime in seconds Current Response Type a value for the tuning parameter that determines the Time Constant speed of the control variable action for CV1 CV2 or CV3 in seconds Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 215 AppendixF Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Table 61 IMC Autotune Operator Tab Description Function Security Click to replace the current model parameters with the Configuration and Tuning calculated Autotune model parameters Maintenance Code D Click to start the autotune process for CV1 CV2 or CV3 Click to abort the autotune process This button also becomes active if the process is aborted due to an error IMC Autotune Alarms Tab The IMC Autotune Alarms tab shows all the available alarms for the device and their current status Autotune C 1 for CC A on AA 216 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F IMC Autotune Faceplate Help The Faceplate Help page shows the command buttons that are used by IMC Autotune The faceplate also provides basic instruction on how to use Autotune IMC Autotune Faceplate Help Commands _________ x dfi Wiii p Autotune Start Abort Autotune U
274. ues for positioning faceplates 108 Expands on procedures for using the process library 113 Logix tag severity values section added to Alarms Builder appendix 131 Custom build procedures for FactoryTalk View SE alarms repositioned for 138 Alarms Builder tool New appendix section documents built in instruction faceplates 183 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 3 Summary of Changes Notes 4 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Preface Overview How to Install the Library Table of Contents Additional Resources ccc ccc cece cece cee eens e ce eeseenseeeees 9 Chapter 1 Library Denei ervenn a aes ben ae ee ea Honea anes owe 12 Using Library Object Documentation 0 ee ee ee 13 FO Processin Gs 4 tia tatu stan E E E E 15 Resulatory Control cakes adie erra E ean boreaen eens 21 Procedural Contoh escccsechocedumsnietededaa Rete A 23 MOLO 5 6 actors de ensure See eee ae tegen ew E a E eat Nicos Sao Ge E 25 VAN se Soca i cn eee oe eee ea enna Bees 34 Seam ae ace eet cessctch a anenk poarsee Deas ao mua E E 38 Cross Functional 024000002 e te civhut aa te ees a aa 40 Didenostic ODES aeia E E 44 ABEN Ae ac en oe cet R ence eee EE O A 45 Timeand Date Math 224202 snr aoenadeeeedenn ee e ee a a i 45 Graphics for Built in Instructions 0 cece eee eee eee 46 Advanced Process Control Function Blocks CC IMC MMC 46 Advanced Process Contr
275. ul beyond this ladder diagram function T_ SUB DateTime DateTime Time T_Sub Subtract Date Time minus time to get new Date Time T_SUB_1_0 01_AOI L5X This instruction subtracts a given amount of time from a Date Time to arrive at a new Date Time The new Date Time is normalized that is given as a valid if possible Gregorian Date and Time 0 lt Microseconds lt 1 000 000 0 lt Seconds lt 60 This instruction cannot add leap seconds 0 lt Minutes lt 60 0 lt Hours lt 24 1 lt Day lt 31 AND Date is a Valid Gregorian Date 1 lt Month lt 12 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 175 AppendixD Additional Add On Instructions Name Short Description Long Description File Name T_Sun Sun Rise Set Az El This instruction takes a given Date Time and for the date part plus the configured T_Sun_1_0 00_AOI L5X latitude longitude and UTC offset returns the Date Time of local sunrise and local sunset to the nearest minute to an accuracy of within about two minutes Solar Azimuth heading clockwise in degrees from true north and Elevation degrees above horizon are calculated and accurate to within about half a degree when the sun is above the horizon Azimuth bearing is not necessarily accurate when elevation is more than a degree or two negative The given date is assumed valid If necessary check by using T_Valid first IMPORTANT This instruction only uses the mo
276. umps 2 Clear Search Results Beck Next 140 TIP For details see Create Alarm Import Files from the Help menu as explained on page 127 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B C Synchronize AE and Logix Tags AE configuration tags are initialized to the default values in the data type alarm definitions Some of the configuration parameters severity acknowledge required can be configured synched with the Logix tag values The Set Alarm Builder s AE Tag Configuration Parameters to Logix Tag Parameter Values dialog box appears Set Alarm Builder s AE Tag Configuration Parameters to Logix Tag Parameter Values E Logix Tags Configured with Alarms Synchronization Parameters Controller ProcessObjects_3_1_00 ProcessObjects_3_1_00 ProcessObjects_3_1_00 ProcessObjects_3_1_00 ProcessObjects_3_1_00 ProcessObjects_3_1_00 Tag EAL_P3 FAL_P3 FIC_P3 Fl_2 FQIC_2 FQIC_2_ChanRate C Include Array Tag Elements in Alarm Export Sync Savery sync HasAlarm Sync AckRequried Sync Tag Label Desc Sync Alarm Condition Sync ALMD ALMA Severity Description v If configured setthe AE alarm tag s severity value by mapping to the Logix tag s alarm element severity value Mapping table Information Low Warning Medium Exception High Fault Urgent v If configured set AE severity to Logix severity tag address ava
277. ured to display the corresponding Logix tag faceplate by using the parameter file passing The parameter file containing the tag address is automatically added to the HMI project s par folder AE tag s Alarm Class parameter is configured with the Logix tag s controller name program name tag name and tag data type AE status and control tags for data types are automatically configured by using the PlantPAx P_Alarm Add On Instruction All other AE parameters are configured based on the Logix data type alarm definition 136 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 SS ee ff Proces HMI Alarm Servers Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B Follow these steps to create the XML import file by using the default settings 1 Right click the alarm server name and from the pull down menu choose Build FactoryTalk A amp E Alarms XML Import File gt Quick Build use default options i Change Controllers Associated with Alarm Server Rename Alarm Server Remove Alarm Server Build FactoryTalk A amp E Alarms XML Import File gt Quick Build use default options Build Parameter File for AE Alarm Summary Filter Tree Seley Organize Tags and Displays Review Options Build Pararneter File for AE Alarm Summary Filter Tree with Alarm Tag Names Compare Logix Tags with AE Configuration Build ME Alarms XML Import File gt Expand All Collapse All A di
278. ut returns to Auto PVTracking stops Click to show the Autotune Operator faceplate Operator High Type the High alarm value for SP1 SP2 Alarm CV1 CV2 or CV3 Operator Low Alarm Type the Low alarm limit value for SP1 SP2 CV1 CV2 or CV3 CV RoC Pos Type the positive Rate of Change limit value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 Rate of change limiting is used only when in Auto mode or in Manual mode if CVManLimiting is true A value of zero disables CV1 ROC limiting CV RoC Neg Type the negative Rate of Change limit value for CV1 CV2 or CV3 Rate of change limiting is used only when in Auto mode or in Manual mode if CVManLimiting is true A value of zero disables CV2 ROC limiting Override Value Type the Override value for CV1 CV2 or V3 CV1 CV2 or CV3 is set to this value when in the Override mode Target Value Type the Target calue for CV1 CV2 or CV3 output Equipment Maintenance Code C Configuration and Tuning Maintenance Code D PVTracking None SP1HLimit SP2HLimit CV1HLimit CV2HLimit CV3HLimit SP1LLimit SP2LLimit CV1LLimit CV2LLimit CV3LLimit CV1ROCPosLimit CV2ROCPosLimit CV3ROCPosLimit CV1ROCNegLimit CV2ROCNegLimit CV3ROCNegLimit CV10verrideValue CV20verrideValue CV30verrideValue CV1Target CV2Target CV3Target Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Maintenance Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the MMC Maintenance tab shows the fol
279. ut the lock seal feedback failed to show the device unlocked before the move or locked after the move within the configured time allowed Cfg_LockChkT The device can be configured to either alarm only or to shed to a de energized state on a Lock Fail Common Configuration Considerations Chapter 3 Library Objects I 0 Processing objects including e P_AlnDual e P_PIDE I 0 Processing objects including e P_Aln e P_AlnAdv e P_AlnDual e P_AlnMulti Regulatory Control objects including P_PIDE I 0 Processing objects including P_AlnAdv I 0 Processing Motor and Valve objects including e P_DASD P_DOut P_ Motor P_Motor2Spd P_MotorHO P_MotorRev P_nPos P_PF52x P_PF753 P_PF755 P_PIDE P_SMC50 P_SMCFlex P_ValveC P_ValveHO P_ValveMP P_ValveSO P_VSD 1 0 Processing Motor and Valve objects including e P_DASD P_DOut P_E1PlusE P_ 3000vid P_E30vld P_ Motor P_Motor2Spd P_MotorHO P_MotorRev P_nPos P_PF52x P_PF753 P_PF755 P_SMC50 P_SMCFlex P_ValveC P_ValveHO P_ValveMO P_ValveMP P_ValveSO P_VSD I 0 Processing objects including e P_Aln e P_AlnAdv e P_AlnDual e P_AlnMulti Valve objects including P_nPos Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 89 Chapter 3 Common Configuration Considerations Table 34 P_Alarm Types by Library Objects Alarm Type LoDev LoLo LoLoDev MinGood MotorFault NoneGood OffFail OneGood OnFail O
280. utomation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 193 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions The following table shows the functions of page 1 of the CC Engineering tab Table 50 CC Engineering Tab Page 1 Description Function Configuration Parameters Engineering CVManLimiting Configuration Code E Place instruction in Check to set the Loop mode to manual ManualAfterInit Manual mode while when CV initialization is requested CVinitializing isset Clear the checkbox to leave the Loop mode unchanged when initialization is requested When the initialization request clears the loop resumes control in its Limit CV in manual Check to limit the current value when in Mode Manual mode previous Loop mode Reset Program Check to reset Program inputs after each ProgValueReset Inputs after each execution execution Model Gain units Select either EU or for the Model Gain GainEUSpan units Target Response Type a value for the Target Response Time JargetRespTC Time Constant Constant PV Deviation Action Click to select CV1 CV2 or CV3 to be the e ActistCV Priority first second or third to act to compensate Act2ndCV First for PV SP deviation Act3rdCV Second Third Engineering Tab Page 2 Page 2 of the CC Engineering tab has various Operator inputs options for the PV CV timing execution mode RTS period oversample and time used to calculate output C 1 2 PV on Cv2 Cv
281. value EU e Current value from Maintenance page 3 CV Value in CV Initial Current Value Hand Mode Value EU m A Maintenance Positive and CV1 RoC Limits Negative Rate of Change Limits C 1 Override CV1 Override ______________ 0 00 C 2 RoC Limits 0 00 0 00 CV3 RoC Limits 0 00 0 00 C 2 Override CV 3 Override 0 00 C1 Hand FB CV3 Hand FB 0 00 0 00 C 1 Init Value C2 Init Value V3 Init Value 0 00 0 00 0 00 CV 1 EU Min Max CV Maximum and oe 100 00 Minimum in _ Engineering Units C 2 EU Min Max 100 00 0 00 CV 3 EU Min Max 100 00 0 00 Current Value EU CV Output The following table shows the functions of page 3 of the CC Maintenance tab Table 49 CC Maintenance Tab Page 4 Description CV RoC Positive Type the CV1 CV2 or CV3 positive or Configurationand e CV1ROCPosLimit Limit negative rate of change limit in percent Tuning CV2ROCPosLimit per second Maintenance CV3ROCPosLimit T ie Negative Rate of change limiting is used only when Code D CV1ROCNegLimit alt in Auto mode or in Manual mode if e CV2ROCNegLimit CVManLimiting is true e CV3ROCNegLimit A value of zero disables CV1 ROC limiting CV Override Type the CV1 CV2 or CV3 Override value CV10verrideValue CV1 CV2 or CV3 is set to this value when e CV20verrideValue in Override mode e CV30verrideValue This value is recom
282. verTol PosFail TareFault TgtDisagree TransitStall Trip TripFail 90 Alarm Description PV falls below SP by Low threshold Threshold is set by Operator or Program Deadband gating timing and severity are set in configuration Library Objects e P_AlnDual e P PIDE PV below Low Low threshold Threshold is set by Operator or Program 1 0 Processing objects including Deadband gating timing and severity are set in configuration e P_Aln e P_AlnAdv e P_AlnDual e P_AlnMulti PV falls below SP by Low Low threshold Threshold is set by Operator or Program Deadband gating timing and severity are set in configuration Regulatory Control objects including P_PIDE At least one input signal has been rejected and the remaining unrejected Signals are the minimum number configured as required for a good PV The next input failure causes the PV to be flagged as Bad 1 0 Processing objects including P_AlnMulti Occurs when a fault is detected by the smart motor controller Motor objects including P_SMC50 P_SMCFlex 1 0 Processing objects including P_AlnDual Warning if neither PV input s quality is good Raised if both PV inputs have bad or uncertain quality Triggered when the device is commanded Off but device feedback does not confirm the device is Off within the configured time The OffFail Status Alarm has a configurable time Cfg_OffFailT so the device feedbacks can show the device reached the Off
283. verity Search and Replace pop up menu item Note also this tool operates only on tags with data types configured with alarm definitions and the alarm definition is configured with Severity synchronization parameters Refer to the Alarm Definitions Builder Tool user manual C Do not show this dialog when loading project 1 Do one of the following a Click Cancel to run the tool at a later time To reaccess the prompt right click Logix Controllers and choose Tag Severity Search and Replace from the pull down menu it Logix Controllers L si 4 47 RSL5k_21_S J HMI Alarm Serve Search Tags Add Controller Tag Severity Search and Replace b Click OK to replace the severity values The Replacement Severity Tool dialog box appears a Logix Severity Tag Values Search and Replace Select Controllers vee Md ProcessObjects_3_1_00 Severity Search and Replace Values Description Search Values Replacement Values Information Low Warning Medium Exception High Fault Urgent Reset Severities to PlantPAx Defaults 2 Run Cancel 2 In the top box select a controller Controllers that contain Version 3 1 or later of the P_Alarm Add On Instruction are automatically selected 3 In the bottom box change the values by typing in the respective cells Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Alarms Builder Tool Appendix B 4 Cli
284. vld P_E30vld Raised if the flow total fails to clear or the flow is cleared and still Procedural Control objects including accumulates flow before the start flow command is received P_DoseFM Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 Chapter 3 91 Chapter 3 92 Common Configuration Considerations Local INT Tag with Bit Number Alarm with FactoryTalk Alarm and Event Server FactoryIalk View SE alarms use digital alarms one digital alarm per P_Alarm instance This section describes how to configure digital alarm parameters As shown in Figure 6 each object with alarms has a P_Alarm instance for each alarm and each P_Alarm instance has a Local Tag Com_AE x specifically for communicating all alarm status and commands with the FactoryTalk Alarm and Event server Figure 6 FactoryTalk View SE Alarm Path Browsable Type by Hand or use Alarm Builder Tool Mix P50_Motor FailToStart Com_AE 0 Handshaking Bits Communication Bits Alarm Description AE Status AE Control Path Object Backing Tag Alarm Com_AE 0 Alarm to AE alarm condition required for digital alarm No No Com_AE 1 Acknowledged from AE Status Acknowledge to AE Control Yes Com_AE 3 Shelved from AE Status No Com_AE 4 Shelve to AE Control No Yes Com_AE 5 Unshelve to AE Control No Yes Com_AE 6 Suppressed from AE Status see Important on page 93 No Com_AE 7 Suppress to AE Control No Yes Com_AE 8 Unsuppress to AE Control No
285. wa 2 vanesbyzone varies byzone 2 2 T 2 o C Fwimn o0 T CdS o o o o r7 0 false O false First Sunday in Last Sunday in Saturday before For 2014 Sunday between First Sunday in First Sunday in n n November at October at 01 00 Last Sunday in June 28 at Rosh Hashanah April at 03 00 Novem ber at 00 01 Pall Bok Rule 02 00 Local UTC October at 23 00 02 00 Local and Yom Kippur Local Local fall back 2 UTC varies hours Cfg_BackMo ar J o o T e J wes CTTTCdrC tsTC C S Cfg BackOccur E O Cig_BackDoW SL o a o o o Cig_BackDoM ae a fo Cig BackDoWBefore Cd SCCSTTC sS SC TTTCTCTCrTCTCTC CSY SC CTC drS SCSTC J 2 varies by zone variesbyzone 2 2 2 oOo Cfg_BackMin o f o T o T o T o To o T nS Y oO Cig_BackFixedDate Cfg_BackUseBefore Cig_Offset PO oS Cig_EnableDST Name Short Description Long Description File Name T_EQU DateTime DateTime This instruction compares two Date and Time of Day DateTime variables T_EQU_1_0 01_AOI L5X If DT1 is equal to DT2 EnableOut and Out are set to true 1 Otherwise EnableOut and Out are cleared to false 0 This instruction can be used in Ladder Diagram Structured Text or Function Block Routines just like the EQU instruction is used for integers and floating point numbers However because it has InOut Paramete
286. wse to your downloaded Rockwell Automation library files 4 Click the graphics folder 72 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 How to Install the Library Chapter 2 5 Click the Images folder E Add Component Into Project xn GO gt Files Process Objects Library Graphics gt Images v Search Images p Organize v New folder BE CB Hardware and g Alarm_AckRequired png R CmdBtnFace_CloseRdyActive png Ma CrdBtnFace_NormalPressed png he Network and Ir R Alarm_Exception png R CmdBtnFace_CloseReady png R CmdBtnFace_NormalRdyActive png CE E Programs R Alarm_Fault png Ma CrndBtnFace_DeenergizePressed png M CmdBtnFace_NormalReady png CE Ge System and Sec l Alarm_Info png Ma CmdBtnFace_DeenergizeRdyActive png M CmdBtnFace_OpenPressed png CE 8 User Accounts R Alarm Inhibit png R CrndBtnFace_DeenergizeReady png m CmdBtnFace_OpenRdyActive png CE Recycle Bin R Alarm_Warning png Ma CmdBtnFace_Disabled png R CmdBtnFace_OpenReady png CE 4 Files M Breadcrumb_Attention png M CmdBtnFace_DisablePressed png m CmdBtnFace_OperPressed png CE dh Graphics for Bu R Breadcrumb_BadConfig png Ma CmdBtnFace_DisableReady png M CmdBtnFace_OperReady png mic Ji Logix Diagnost Ma Breadcrumb_Information png Ma Crd BtnFace_EnergizePressed png R CmdBtnFace_ResetAckReady png CE
287. x 5000 By Usin ga Spr eadsheet software by opening the instruction logic of the Add On Instruction instance and then opening the Data Monitor on a local tag The following procedure is for using a spreadsheet for uploading saving and downloading restoring the configuration Cfg parameters from library instances in an online controller See the Warning above that applies for the controller that is being used before starting these steps 1 Download the Rockwell Automation Library from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support downloads page 2 Open Tools amp Utilities and double click PlantPAx Online Configuration Tool 3 Open the Excel spreadsheet The spreadsheet opens in the default Setup folder at the bottom of the screen xi id Y jz PlantPAx_OnlineConfigTool_3_0_01 xls Compatibility Mode N Microsoft Excel ecnlofeThe Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View Developer Acrobat a Qo o P X9 Cut a v r Gh E AutoSum i 5 Arial 79 TA gt a g Wrap Text General z B 7 E do T a rT od FA 23 Copy 2 m Fill Paste i B z ee nee eter ee E meses cenet s 9 09 Conditional Format Cell Insert Delete Format Sort amp Find amp F Format Painter U H 2 4 g 00 gt 02 Formatting as Table Styles 2Cear Fitter Select Clipboard P Font P Alignment Number F Styles
288. x to access a text cursor and manually type the change The format of the expression changes from Path Object Ack_Alarm to Path Object Alarm OCmd_Ack EA Alarm Setup ME70_Sarmples_Lib_3007 Triggers Select trigger Trigger settings M i PSO Motor Alm FailToSkar Trigger type Trigger label F Use ack all value 0 Optional trigger connections _ Name Tagorexpression p Taa Expin CY ee Ack Mi S0 Motor FalToStatOCmd Ad MixJP50_Motor Ack_FailT oStart Edit Message Message Notification Remove Message Handshake Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 101 Chapter3 Common Configuration Considerations IMPORTANT Each Ack tag occurrence can be changed in the alarm database by exporting the alarms and making the changes with an editing tool then importing the changes Simply Find and Replace every Ack tag of Ack_FailToStart to FailToStart 0Cmd_ Ack Perform a similar Find and Replace for each type of alarm FailToStop lOFault and so forth Be careful when performing the Find and Replace procedure that you do not change the RemoteAck entries Configure the Alarm Message Follow these steps to define a message that appears when the alarm occurs 1 On the FactoryTalk View ME Alarm Setup dialog box click the Messages tab Eq Alarm setup MEFO_Sarniples Lib_s0or Trigger fiter Sart by larm messages Ce s L EL Una
289. ximum limits for Engineering PVEUMax the PV in engineering units Configuration PVEUMin Code E 206 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 CV Program Value 0 00 CV Track Value CY Tracking i en From Previous Page 100 00 0 00 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Appendix F Table 57 IMC Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description Configurationand ModelGain Tuning Gain Type a value for the internal model gain Enter a positive or negative gain depending on process direction Maintenance Code D Time Constant Type a value for the internal model Time ModelTC Constant in seconds Dead Time Type a value for the internal model ModelDT Deadtime in seconds RIC Type a value for the tuning parameter that RespIC determines the speed of the control variable action in seconds Click to open the CV Autotune faceplate None yD Maintenance Tab Page 3 Page 3 of the IMC Maintenance tab shows the following information e Calculated CV from Maintenance page 2 e CV Program value in percent e CV track value e CV value in Hand mode e CV initialization value in CV engineering units e CVin engineering units IMC S Z A 2 3 1 Positive and Negative Rate of Change Limits cy CY Rol Ly C 0 00 si 0 00 Override CV Override 0 00 p gt Calculated CY Hand Feedback 0 00 C Init value CY Limits 0 00 CV Value in Hand Mode CV Initi
290. ype a value for the low input cutoff Configurationand LowinCutoff When the input is set at or below Tuning LowInCutoff totalization stops Maintenance Code D ResetValue Reset Value Type a value for reset input Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES RM002C EN P November 2014 259 Appendix F 260 Faceplates for Built in Logix5000 Instructions Engineering Tab The Engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and ranges options for device and I O setup displayed text and faceplate to faceplate navigation settings for initial system commissioning or later system changes Totalizer Gain multiplier for totalized value ee Time Base Seconds Minutes Hours Days Timing execution mode Periodic Oversampling Real Time RTS Period 1 000 Oversample At 0 000 Elapsed time in seconds used to 125 calculate the process output The following table shows the functions of the TOT engineering tab Table 88 TOT Engineering Tab Description Gain multiplier for Type a value for the multiplier of the Engineering Gain the incremental incremental totalized value Configuration totalized value Code E Time Base Click to select the time base for the time TimeBase Seconds base input Minutes Hours Days Timing execution Click to select the timing execution mode Engineering TimingMode mode Configuration Periodic Code E Oversampling Real Time Rockwell Automat

proces-rm002 - Literature Library

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents